480633
3
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/156
Pagina verder
INTEGRATED NETWORK AV RECEIVER
AVR-3312
Owners Manual
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
I
n
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE
COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral
triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of
uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure
that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of
electric shock to persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended
to alert the user to the presence of important operating
and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature
accompanying the appliance.
WARNING:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT
EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
CAUTION:
To completely disconnect this product from the mains, disconnect the plug
from the wall socket outlet.
The mains plug is used to completely interrupt the power supply to the unit
and must be within easy access by the user.
IMPORTANT SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS
1. Read these instructions.
2. Keep these instructions.
3. Heed all warnings.
4. Follow all instructions.
5. Do not use this apparatus near water.
6. Clean only with dry cloth.
7. Do not block any ventilation openings.
Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
8. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers,
stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
9. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at
plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the
apparatus.
10. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.
11. Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table
specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus.
When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/
apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
12. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when
unused for long periods of time.
13. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way,
such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or
objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to
rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.
14. Batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or
the like.
•DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
We declare under our sole responsibility that this product, to which this
declaration relates, is in conformity with the following standards:
EN60065, EN55013, EN55020, EN61000-3-2 and EN61000-3-3.
Following the provisions of Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC and EMC
Directive 2004/108/EC, the EC regulation 1275/2008 and its frame work
Directive 2009/125/EC for Energy-related Products (ErP).
A NOTE ABOUT RECYCLING:
This product’s packaging materials are recyclable and can
be reused. Please dispose of any materials in accordance
with the local recycling regulations.
When discarding the unit, comply with local rules or
regulations.
Batteries should never be thrown away or incinerated
but disposed of in accordance with the local regulations
concerning battery disposal.
This product and the supplied accessories, excluding the
batteries, constitute the applicable product according to the
WEEE directive.
DENON EUROPE
Division of D&M Germany GmbH
An der Kleinbahn 18, Nettetal,
D-41334 Germany
CAUTION:
HOT SURFACE. DO NOT TOUCH.
The top surface over the internal heat sink may become hot
when operating this product continuously.
Do not touch hot areas, especially around the “Hot surface
mark” and the top panel.
Hot
surface
mark
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
II
n
NOTES ON USE
WARNINGS
•Avoid high temperatures.
Allow for sufficient heat dispersion when installed in a rack.
•Handle the power cord carefully.
Hold the plug when unplugging the cord.
•Keep the unit free from moisture, water, and dust.
•Unplug the power cord when not using the unit for long periods of time.
•Do not obstruct the ventilation holes.
•Do not let foreign objects into the unit.
•Do not let insecticides, benzene, and thinner come in contact with the unit.
•Never disassemble or modify the unit in any way.
•Ventilation should not be impeded by covering the ventilation openings
with items, such as newspapers, tablecloths or curtains.
•Naked flame sources such as lighted candles should not be placed on
the unit.
•Observe and follow local regulations regarding battery disposal.
•Do not expose the unit to dripping or splashing fluids.
•Do not place objects filled with liquids, such as vases, on the unit.
•Do not handle the mains cord with wet hands.
•When the switch is in the OFF (STANDBY) position, the equipment is not
completely switched off from MAINS.
•The equipment shall be installed near the power supply so that the power
supply is easily accessible.
n CAUTIONS ON INSTALLATION
z z
z
Wall
z
z For proper heat dispersal, do not install this unit in a confined
space, such as a bookcase or similar enclosure.
•More than 0.3 m is recommended.
•Do not place any other equipment on this unit.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
1
Thank you for purchasing this DENON product. To ensure proper operation, please read this owner’s manual carefully before using the product.
After reading them, be sure to keep them for future reference.
Getting started
Basic version ············································································4
Connections ··················································································· 5
Important information ··································································· 5
Connecting an HDMI-compatible device ······································7
Connecting a TV··········································································10
Connecting a Blu-ray Disc player ················································11
Connecting a DVD player ····························································11
Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV) ···················· 12
Connecting a digital video recorder ············································13
Connecting a digital camcorder ··················································14
Connecting a control dock for iPod ·············································14
Connecting an iPod or USB memory device to the USB port ·····15
Connecting an antenna ······························································· 16
Connecting a record player ························································· 17
Connecting a CD player ······························································17
Connecting a external power amplifier ······································· 18
Connecting to a home network (LAN) ········································19
Connecting an external control device ········································20
Settings ························································································ 21
Set up speakers (Audyssey® Auto Setup) ·································21
Making the network settings (Network Setup) ···························27
Playback (Basic operation) ·························································28
Important information ································································· 28
Playing a Blu-ray Disc player/DVD player ···································· 30
Playing a CD player ····································································· 30
Playing an iPod············································································31
Tuning in radio stations ·······························································35
Playing a network audio ······························································39
Playing a USB memory device ····················································51
Selecting a listening mode (SURROUND MODE) ····················53
Selecting a listening mode··························································53
Advanced version ·······························································58
Speaker installation/connection (Advanced connection) ·······59
Install ··························································································59
Connect ······················································································61
Set up speakers ·········································································· 67
Playback (Advanced operation) ·················································70
Convenient functions ··································································70
Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3 (Separate room) ··························81
Audio output ···············································································81
Video output ···············································································82
Playback ······················································································82
Quick select function ·································································· 83
Sleep timer function ···································································83
How to make detailed settings ··················································84
Menu map ··················································································84
Examples of menu screen displays ············································85
Examples of menu and front display ··········································86
Inputting characters ··································································· 87
SOURCE SELECT ·······································································89
AUDIO/VIDEO ADJUST ······························································ 96
SYSTEM SETUP ·······································································103
INFORMATION ·········································································119
Operating the connected devices by remote control unit ····120
Operating AV devices ·······························································120
Registering preset codes ··························································121
Operating devices ·····································································123
Specifying the zone used with the main remote control unit ··· 125
Resetting the remote control unit ·············································125
Information ···········································································126
Part names and functions·························································127
Front panel ················································································127
Display ······················································································128
Rear panel ·················································································129
Remote control unit ·································································· 130
Other information ·····································································132
Trademark information ······························································132
Surround ···················································································133
Relationship between video signals and monitor output ··········139
Explanation of terms ·································································141
Troubleshooting ········································································ 144
Resetting the microprocessor ··················································148
Specifications ············································································149
Getting started ··············································································1
Accessories ··················································································2
Features ························································································2
Cautions on handling ····································································3
Contents
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
2
Features
Fully discrete, identical quality and power for all
7 channels (165 W x 7ch)
The unit is equipped with a power amplifier that reproduces
highfidelity sound in surround mode with equal quality and power
for all channels, true to the original sound.
The power amplifier circuit adopts a discrete-circuit configuration
that achieves high-quality surround sound reproduction.
Supports internet radio, music, and photograph
streaming
Supports AirPlay
®
(vpage75)
When connected to a network, this unit can play audio files and still
images such as photographs that are stored on your computer. You
can also listen to internet radio and a host of other online music
sources that use network technology. This unit also supports
AirPlay that lets you stream your music library from an iPhone,
iPad, iPod touch or iTunes.
Compatible with “Denon Remote App” for
performing basic operations of the unit with an
iPhone or iPod touch
z1
“Denon Remote App” is application software that allows you to
perform basic operations with an iPhone or iPod touch such as
turning the unit ON/OFF, controlling the volume, and switching the
source.
z1 Download “Denon Remote App” from iTunes
®
App Store.
The unit needs to be connected to a LAN and the iPhone/iPod
touch needs to be connected to the same network by Wi-Fi
(wireless LAN).
Setup Wizard, providing easy-to-follow setup
instructions
First select the language when prompted. Then simply follow the
instructions displayed on the TV screen to set up the speakers,
network, etc.
Easy to use, Graphical User Interface
This unit is equipped with an easy to see “Graphical User Interface”
that uses menu displays and levels. The use of level displays
increases operability of the this unit.
Direct play for iPod
®
and iPhone
®
via USB
(vpage15)
Music data from an iPod can be played back if you connect the USB
cable supplied with the iPod via the USB port of this unit, and also
an iPod can be controlled with the remote control unit for this unit.
When an iPod is connected, merely pressing iPod 1 on the main
unit starts playback of music from the iPod.
Supports HDMI 1.4a with 3D, ARC, Deep Color,
“x.v.Color” , Auto Lip Sync and HDMI control
function (vpage7)
This unit can output 3D video signals input from a Blu-ray Disc
player to a TV that supports a 3D system. This unit also supports
the ARC (Audio Return Channel) function, which reproduces TV
sound with this unit via an HDMI cable used for connecting the
unit and a TV
z2
.
z2 The TV should support the ARC function.
7-HDMI inputs and 2-outputs
The unit is equipped with 7 HDMI input connectors for connecting
devices with HDMI connectors, such as a Blu-ray Disc player,
game machine, HD video camera, etc.
Accessories
Check that the following parts are supplied with the product.
q Getting Started ........................................................................ 1
w CD-ROM (Owner’s manual) .................................................... 1
e Service network list ................................................................. 1
r Power cord .............................................................................. 1
t Remote control unit (RC-1156) ................................................ 1
y R6/AA batteries ....................................................................... 2
u Setup microphone (DM-A409) ................................................. 1
i AM loop antenna ..................................................................... 1
o FM indoor antenna .................................................................. 1
tr
i o
u
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
vSee overleaf
3
Cautions on handling
•Before turning the power on
Check once again that all connections are correct and that there are
no problems with the connection cables.
•Power is supplied to some of the circuitry even when the unit is
set to the standby mode. When going on vacation or leaving home
for long periods of time, be sure to unplug the power cord from the
power outlet.
•About condensation
If there is a major difference in temperature between the inside of
the unit and the surroundings, condensation (dew) may form on
the operating parts inside the unit, causing the unit not to operate
properly.
If this happens, let the unit sit for an hour or two with the power
turned off and wait until there is little difference in temperature
before using the unit.
•Cautions on using mobile phones
Using a mobile phone near this unit may result in noise. If that
occurs, move the mobile phone away from this unit when it is in use.
•Moving the unit
Turn off the power and unplug the power cord from the power
outlet. Next, disconnect the connection cables to other system units
before moving the unit.
•About care
•Wipe the cabinet and control panel clean with a soft cloth.
•Follow the instructions when using a chemical cleaner.
•Benzene, paint thinner or other organic solvents as well as
insecticide may cause material changes and discoloration if brought
into contact with the unit, and should therefore not be used.
Simultaneous playback on two HDMI channels
This unit is equipped with two HDMI MONITOR outputs. You can
connect one output to a projector and the other output to a TV for
simultaneous signal outputs.
All sources are up-scaled to 1080p
The unit is provided with an HDMI video up-scaling function that
converts an analog video signal input to the unit to a 1080p (HD
resolution) signal and supplies it to a TV via the HDMI connector.
This enables the unit and a TV connected with a single HDMI cable
and any video source to be reproduced precisely with HD level of
quality.
High definition audio support
The unit is equipped with a decoder which supports high-quality
digital audio format for Blu-ray Disc players such as Dolby TrueHD,
DTS-HD Master Audio, etc.
Audyssey DSX™
This unit is equipped with Audyssey DSX processor. By connecting
front height speakers to this unit and playing back through Audyssey
DSX, you can experience a more powerful playback expression in
the height audio range. By connecting front wide speakers, you
can experience a more powerful playback expression in the wide
audio range.
Features
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Basic
version
4
F Connections vpage5
F Settings vpage21
F Playback (Basic operation) vpage28
F Selecting a listening mode (SURROUND MODE) vpage53
Connection
vpage8, 10
Connection
vpage8, 11
Playback
Playback
vpage30
Connection
vpage8, 11
Connection
vpage17
Playback
vpage30
Playback
vpage30
Connection
vpage8, 13
Connection
vpage8, 12
Playback
Playback
Connection
vpage14
Connection
vpage15
Playback
vpage31
Playback
vpage33
Connection
vpage15
Connection
vpage8
Playback
vpage51
Playback
Connection
vpage14
Connection
vpage17
Playback
Playback
Connection
vpage16
Connection
vpage19
Playback
vpage35
Playback
vpage39
For speaker connections, see page61, C page 6 “Connecting the speakers”.
Basic version
Here, we explain the connections and basic operation methods for this unit.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Basic version
5
Important information
•Make connections as follows before using this unit. Select an
appropriate connection type according to the devices to be
connected.
•You may need to make some settings on this unit depending
on the connection method. Refer to each description for more
information.
•Select the cables (sold separately) according to the devices
being connected.
NOTE
•Do not plug in the power cord until all connections have been
completed (When the Setup wizard is running, follow the instructions
in the Setup wizard screen for making connections. ).
•When running the Setup wizard, turn off the power supply of
connected devices.
•When making connections, also refer to the operating instructions of
the other devices being connected.
•Be sure to connect the left and right channels properly (left with left,
right with right).
•Do not bundle power cords together with connection cables. Doing
so can result in noise.
Connections
Converting input video signals for output (Video conversion function)
This unit is equipped with four types of video input connectors (HDMI, Component video, S-Video and video) and three types of video output
connectors (HDMI, Component video and video).
Use the connectors corresponding to the devices to be connected.
This function automatically converts various formats of video signals input to this unit into the formats used to output the video signals from
this unit to a monitor.
GFlow of video signals for MAIN ZONEH
HDMI connector
Component video
connectors
S-Video connector
Video connector
Monitor (TV)
HDMI connector
Component video
connectors
Component video
connectors
Component video
connectors
S-Video
connector
Video connector
HDMI
connector
Video connector
HDMI connector
Video connector
: when 480i/576i signals are input
Video device
This unit
Output
Input
(IN)
Output
(MONITOR OUT)
Input
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Basic version
vSee overleaf
6
Important information
GFlow of video signals for ZONE2H
S-Video connector
Video connector
Monitor (TV)
S-Video
connector
Video connector Video connector Video connector
Video device
This unit
Output
Input
(IN)
Output
(MONITOR OUT)
Input
•Set when not using the video conversion function.
“Video Convert” (vpage92)
•Set when changing the resolution of the video signal.
“Resolution” (vpage92)
in Set as Necessary
•The video conversion function supports the NTSC, PAL, SECAM, NTSC 4.43, PAL-N, PAL-M and PAL-60
formats.
•The resolution of the video signal output from the HDMI connector of this unit is set in “Resolution”
(vpage92) in the menu (vpage140).
•Resolutions of HDMI-compatible TVs can be checked at “HDMI Information” – “Monitor 1” or “Monitor
2” (vpage119).
NOTE
•HDMI signals cannot be converted into analog signals.
•When a non-standard video signal from a game machine or some other source is input, the video
conversion function might not operate.
•480p/576p/1080i/720p/1080p component video input signals cannot be converted into Video format.
Examples of screen display
•Menu screen •Status display screen
When the input source is
switched.
When the volume is adjusted.
AUDIO/VIDEO ADJUST
Audio Adjust
Picture Adjust
Adjust various audio and video parameters
AUTO
DTS SURROUND
BD
SURROUND
SOURCE
-52.0dB
Status display: The operating status appears briefly on the screen
when the input source is switched or the volume is
changed.
NOTE
•The status display screen cannot be displayed at a computer’s resolution (e.g. VGA) or while certain 3D
video contents is being played.
•When the menu is operated on a computer’s resolution (e.g. VGA) or during playback of certain 3D video
content, the playback image switches to the menu screen image.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Basic version
7
Connecting an HDMI-compatible device
You can connect up to nine HDMI-compatible devices (7-inputs/2-outputs) to the unit.
HDMI function
This unit supports the following HDMI functions:
•3D
•Deep Color (vpage141)
•Auto Lip Sync (vpage107, 141)
•“x.v.Color”, sYCC601 color, Adobe RGB color, Adobe YCC601 color (vpage141, 143)
•High definition digital audio format
•ARC (Audio Return Channel)
•Content Type
•CEC (HDMI control)
Copyright protection system
In order to play back digital video and audio such as BD-Video or DVD-Video via HDMI connection, both
this unit and TV or the player need to support the copyright protection system known as HDCP (High-
bandwidth Digital Content Protection System). HDCP is copyright protection technology comprised of
data encryption and authentication of the connected AV devices. This unit supports HDCP.
•If a device that does not support HDCP is connected, video and audio are not output correctly. Read
the owner’s manual of your television or player for more information.
About HDMI cables
•When a device supporting Deep Color is connected, use a cable compatible with “High Speed HDMI
cable” or “High Speed HDMI cable with Ethernet”.
•When the ARC function is used, connect a device with a ”Standard HDMI cable with Ethernet” or “High
Speed HDMI cable with Ethernet” for HDMI 1.4a.
HDMI control function (vpage70)
This function allows you to operate external devices from the unit and operate the unit from external
devices.
NOTE
•The HDMI control function may not work depending on the device it is connected to and its settings.
•You cannot operate a TV or Blu-ray Disc player/DVD player that is not compatible with the HDMI control
function.
About 3D function
This unit supports input and output of 3D (3 dimensional) video signals of HDMI 1.4a.
To play back 3D video, you need a TV and player that provide support for the HDMI1.4a 3D function and
a pair of 3D glasses.
NOTE
•When playing back 3D video, refer to the instructions provided in the manual of your playback device
together with this manual.
•When playing back 3D video content, the menu screen or status display screen can be superimposed
over the image. However, the menu screen or status display screen cannot be superimposed over
certain 3D video content.
•If 3D video with no 3D information is input, the menu screen and status display on this unit are displayed
over the playback video.
•If 2D video is converted to 3D video on the television, the menu screen and status display on this unit
are not displayed correctly. To view the menu screen and status display on this unit correctly, turn the
television setting that converts 2D video to 3D video off.
About ARC (Audio Return Channel) function
The Audio Return Channel in HDMI 1.4a enables a TV, via a single HDMI cable, to send audio data “upstream”
to this unit.
NOTE
•To enable the ARC function, set “HDMI Control” – “Control” to “ON” (vpage108).
•The ARC function cannot use the HDMI MONITOR 1 and HDMI MONITOR 2 connectors simultaneously.
Perform the “HDMI Control” – “Control Monitor” setting in accordance with a TV that supports the ARC
function and HDMI MONITOR connector in this unit.
•When connecting a TV that does not support the ARC function, a separate connection using an audio
cable is required. In this case, refer to “Connecting a TV” (vpage10) for the connection method.
About Content Type
HDMI 1.4a enables simple, automated picture setting selection with no user intervention.
NOTE
To enable the Content Type, set “Video Mode” to “Auto” (vpage91).
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Basic version
vSee overleaf
8
Connecting an HDMI-compatible device
OUT
HDMI
GFront panelH
Digital
camcorder
•When this unit is connected to other devices with HDMI cables, connect this unit and TV also with an
HDMI cable.
•When connecting a device that supports Deep Color, please use a “High Speed HDMI cable” or “High
Speed HDMI cable with Ethernet”.
•Video signals are not output if the input video signals do not match the monitor’s resolution. In this case,
switch the Blu-ray Disc/DVD player’s resolution to a resolution with which the monitor is compatible.
•When this unit and monitor are connected with an HDMI cable, if the monitor is not compatible with
HDMI audio signal playback, only the video signals are output to the monitor.
NOTE
•When you use the HDMI control function, set “HDMI Control” – “Control” (vpage108) to “ON” and
set the HDMI MONITOR connector that you want to operate by the HDMI control function in “Control
Monitor”.
•The audio signal from the HDMI output connector (sampling frequency, number of channels, etc.) may be
limited by the HDMI audio specifications of the connected device regarding permissible inputs.
Cables used for connections
Audio and video cable (sold separately)
HDMI cable
•This interface allows transfer of digital video signals and digital audio signals over a single HDMI cable.
OUT
HDMI
OUT
HDMI
OUT
HDMI
OUT
HDMI
OUT
HDMI
OUT
HDMI
IN
HDMI
IN
HDMI
Blu-ray
Disc
player
DVD
player
TV 1 TV 2
Set-top
box
Game
console 1
Game
console 2
Digital
video
recorder
GRear panelH
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Basic version
vSee overleaf
9
Connecting an HDMI-compatible device
Connecting to a device equipped with a DVI-D connector
When an HDMI/DVI conversion cable (sold separately) is used, the HDMI video signals are converted to
DVI signals, allowing connection to a device equipped with a DVI-D connector.
NOTE
•No sound is output when connected to a device equipped with a DVI-D connector. Make separate audio
connections.
•Signals cannot be output to DVI-D devices that do not support HDCP.
•Depending on the combination of devices, the video signals may not be output.
nSettings related to HDMI connections
Set as necessary. For details, see the respective reference pages.
Input Assign (vpage90)
Set this to change the HDMI input connector to which the input source is assigned.
HDMI Setup (vpage107)
Make settings for HDMI video/audio output.
•Auto Lip Sync •HDMI Audio Out
•Monitor Out •HDMI Control
NOTE
The audio signal input from the HDMI input connector can be output as an output signal from the HDMI
output connector by setting the HDMI audio output destination to TV.
Audio signals input via the Analog/Coaxial/Optical input connectors cannot be output from the HDMI
output connector.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Basic version
10
Cables used for connections
Video cable (sold separately)
Video cable
Component
video cable
Audio cable (sold separately)
Optical cable
IN
VIDEO
AUDIO
OPTICAL
OUT
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y P
B PR
IN
TV
Set this to change the digital input connector or component video input connector to which the input
source is assigned.
“Input Assign” (vpage90)
in Set as Necessary
Connecting a TV
•Select the connector to use and connect the device.
•For video connections, see “Converting input video signals for output (Video conversion function)”
(vpage5).
•For instructions on HDMI connections, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device” (vpage7).
To listen to TV audio through this device, use the optical digital connection.
NOTE
The optical connection is not required when a TV compatible with the ARC function (Audio Return Channel
(HDMI 1.4a standard function) is connected to this unit via an HDMI connection.
For details, see “About ARC (Audio Return Channel) function” (vpage 7) or refer to the instruction
manual for your TV.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Basic version
11
Connecting a Blu-ray Disc player
•You can enjoy video and audio from a Blu-ray Disc.
•Select the connector to use and connect the device.
•For instructions on HDMI connections, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device” (vpage7).
Cables used for connections
Video cable (sold separately)
Video cable
Audio cable (sold separately)
Audio cable
R
L
R
L
L
L
R
R
VIDEO
AUDIO
AUDIO
RL
OUT
OUT
VIDEO
Blu-ray Disc
player
Set this to change the digital input connector or component video input connector to which the input
source is assigned.
“Input Assign” (vpage90)
in Set as Necessary
When you want to play back HD Audio (Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS Express) and Multi-
channel PCM with this unit, use an HDMI connection (vpage 7 “Connecting an HDMI-compatible
device”).
Connecting a DVD player
•You can enjoy video and audio from a DVD.
•Select the connector to use and connect the device.
•For instructions on HDMI connections, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device” (vpage7).
Cables used for connections
Video cable (sold separately)
Video cable
Component
video cable
Audio cable (sold separately)
Audio cable
R
L
R
L
Coaxial
digital cable
R
L
R
L
VIDEO AUDIO
AUDIO
RL
OUT
OUT
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y P
B PR
OUT
OUT
COAXIAL
DVD player
Set this to change the digital input connector or component video input connector to which the input
source is assigned.
“Input Assign” (vpage90)
in Set as Necessary
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Basic version
12
R
L
R
L
VIDEO AUDIO
AUDIO
RL
OUT
OUT
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y P
B PR
OUT
OUT
COAXIAL
Satellite tuner/Cable TV
Set this to change the digital input connector or component video input connector to which the input
source is assigned.
“Input Assign” (vpage90)
in Set as Necessary
Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV)
•You can watch satellite or cable TV.
•Select the connector to use and connect the device.
•For instructions on HDMI connections, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device” (vpage7).
Cables used for connections
Video cable (sold separately)
Video cable
Component
video cable
Audio cable (sold separately)
Audio cable
R
L
R
L
Coaxial
digital cable
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Basic version
13
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
RL RL
OUT
IN
AUDIO VIDEOVIDEO
OUT
OPTICAL
IN
AUDIOAUDIO
OUT
VIDEO
OUT
S-VIDEO VIDEO
AUDIO
Digital video recorder
Set this to change the digital input connector or component video input connector to which the input
source is assigned.
“Input Assign” (vpage90)
in Set as Necessary
NOTE
To record video signals through this unit, use the video cable for connection between this unit and the
player.
Connecting a digital video recorder
•You can record video onto a Blu-ray Disc or DVD.
•Select the connector to use and connect the device.
•When recording analog audio, use the analog connection.
•See “REC OUT mode” (vpage74) for operating instructions.
•For instructions on HDMI connections, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device” (vpage7).
Cables used for connections
Video cable (sold separately)
Video cable
S-Video cable
Audio cable (sold separately)
Audio cable
R
L
R
L
Optical cable
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Basic version
14
Connecting a digital camcorder
•You can enjoy video and audio from a digital camcorder.
•For instructions on HDMI connections, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device” (vpage7).
Cables used for connections
Video cable (sold separately)
Video cable
Audio cable (sold separately)
Audio cable
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
OUT
AUDIO
VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
RL
OUT
Digital camcorder
Set this to change the digital input connector or component video input connector to which the input
source is assigned.
“Input Assign” (vpage90)
in Set as Necessary
You can enjoy games by connecting a game machine via the V.AUX input connector. In this case, select
the input source to “V.AUX”.
NOTE
When a non-standard video signal from a game machine or some other source is input, the video conversion
function might not operate. In this case, use the monitor output of the same connector as the input.
Connecting a control dock for iPod
•Connect a control dock for iPod to the unit to enjoy video and music stored on an iPod.
•For a control dock for iPod, use ASD-1R or ASD-11R made by DENON (sold separately).
•For instructions on the control dock for iPod settings, refer to the control dock for iPod’s operating
instructions.
L
L
R
R
ASD-11R
Control dock for iPod
Use the AV/Control
Cable supplied with
the DENON control
dock for iPod.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Basic version
15
Connecting an iPod or USB memory device to the USB
port
You can enjoy music stored on an iPod or USB memory device.
Cables used for connections
To connect an iPod to this unit, use the USB cable supplied with the iPod.
USB memory
device
iPod
or
•When you want to play back a video file stored on an iPod, use a DENON control dock for iPod (ASD-1R
and ASD-11R, sold separately) (vpage14 “Connecting a control dock for iPod”).
•With iPods, playback is possible with iPhone, iPod touch, classic and nano released from the 5th-generation
of iPods. For details, check page33.
•DENON does not guarantee that all USB memory devices will operate or receive power. When using
a portable USB connection type HDD of the kind to which an AC adapter can be connected to supply
power, use the AC adapter.
NOTE
•USB memory devices will not work via a USB hub.
•Do not use an extension cable when connecting a USB memory device. This may cause radio interference
with other devices.
•This unit does not support playback on an iPad. Do not connect an iPad to the unit.
•When connecting an iPhone to this unit, keep the iPhone at least 20 cm away from this unit. If the iPhone
is kept closer to this unit and a telephone call is received by the iPhone, noise may be output from this
device.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Basic version
16
Connecting an antenna
•Connect the FM antenna or AM loop antenna supplied with the unit
to enjoy listening to radio broadcasts.
•After connecting the antenna and receiving a broadcast signal
(vpage 35 “Listening to FM/AM broadcasts”), fix the antenna
with tape in a position where the noise level becomes minimal.
w eq
FM outdoor
antenna
Direction of broadcasting station
75 Ω coaxial
cable
Ground
AM outdoor
antenna
AM loop antenna
(supplied)
Black
White
FM indoor
antenna
(supplied)
nAM loop antenna assembly
1
Put the stand section
through the bottom of the
loop antenna from the
rear and bend it forward.
Stand
Square
hole
Projecting
part
Loop
antenna
2
Insert the projecting part
into the square hole in
the stand.
nUsing the AM loop antenna
Suspending on a wall
Suspend directly on a wall without assembling.
Nail, tack, etc.
Standing alone
Use the procedure shown above to assemble.
NOTE
•Do not connect two FM antennas simultaneously.
•Even if an external AM antenna is used, do not disconnect the AM
loop antenna.
•Make sure the AM loop antenna lead terminals do not touch metal
parts of the panel.
•If the signal has noise interference, connect the ground terminal
(GND) to reduce noise.
•If you are unable to receive a good broadcast signal, we recommend
installing an outdoor antenna. For details, inquire at the retail store
where you purchased the unit.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Basic version
17
Connecting a record player
You can enjoy playing records.
Cables used for connections
Audio cable (sold separately)
Audio cable
R
L
R
L
GND
AUDIO
OUT
L
R
Turntable
(MM cartridge)
•This unit is compatible with record players with an MM cartridge. When you connect to a record player
with an MC cartridge, use a commercially available MC head amp or a step-up transformer.
•When you increase the volume without connecting the record player, there may be “booming” noise
from the speakers.
NOTE
The SIGNAL GND terminal of this unit is not a safety ground connection. Connect it to reduce noise when
noise is excessive. Note that depending on the record player, connecting the ground line may have the
reverse effect of increasing noise. In this case, it is not necessary to connect the ground line.
Connecting a CD player
•You can enjoy CD sound.
•Select the connector to use and connect the device.
Cables used for connections
Audio cable (sold separately)
Audio cable
R
L
R
L
L
L
R
R
AUDIO
AUDIO
RL
OUT
CD player
Set this to change the digital input connector to which the input source is assigned.
“Input Assign” (vpage90)
in Set as Necessary
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Basic version
18
Connecting a external power amplifier
•You can use this unit as a pre-amp by connecting a commercially available power amp to the PRE OUT
connector. Adding a power amp to each of the channels provides an even greater sound presence.
•Select the terminal to use and connect the device.
Cables used for connections
Audio cable (sold separately)
Audio cable
R
L
R
L
Audio cable
L
L
L
L
L
L
R R R
RR R
SUB-
WOOFER
1
SUB-
WOOFER
2
CENTER SURROUND
BACK
RL
SURROUND
RL
FRONT
RL
AUDIOAUDIO
Power amplifierSubwoofer
•When using just one surround back speaker, connect it to the left channel (L) terminal.
•Use the volume control on the subwoofer to control subwoofer volume.
•If the subwoofer volume sounds low, use the volume control provided on the subwoofer to adjust the
volume.
NOTE
When external power amplifier have been connected to PRE OUT terminals, do not connect the speakers
to the speaker terminals.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Basic version
19
Connecting to a home network (LAN)
•This unit lets you play via your home network (LAN) music files
stored on a computer and music content such as that from Internet
radio.
You can also operate this unit from a computer using the Web
control function.
•You can update by downloading the latest firmware from the
DENON website.
For more information, on the menu, select “Firmware Update”
(vpage117).
•See “Network Setup” on the menu (vpage 110) for more
information on network setting.
Cables used for connections
Cable (sold separately)
Ethernet
cable
Internet
To WAN side
Router
To LAN port
To LAN port
LAN port/
Ethernet
connector
Computer
Modem
For connections to the Internet, contact an ISP (Internet
Service Provider) or a computer shop.
Required system
nBroadband internet connection
nModem
Device that connects to the broadband circuit and conducts
communications on the Internet.
A type that is integrated with a router is also available.
nRouter
When using this unit, we recommend you use a router equipped
with the following functions:
•Built-in DHCP server
This function automatically assigns IP addresses on the LAN.
•Built-in 100BASE-TX switch
When connecting multiple devices, we recommend a switching
hub with a speed of 100 Mbps or greater.
nEthernet cable (CAT-5 or greater recommended)
•Use only a shielded STP or ScTP LAN cable which is available at
retailer.
•Some flat type Ethernet cables are easily affected by noise.
We recommend using a normal type cable.
•If you have an Internet provider contract for a line on which network
settings are made manually, make the settings at “Network Setup”
(vpage110).
•With this unit, it is possible to use the DHCP and Auto IP functions
to make the network settings automatically.
•When using this unit with the broadband router’s DHCP function
enabled, this unit automatically performs the IP address setting and
other settings.
When using this unit connected to a network with no DHCP
function, make the settings for the IP address, etc., at “Network
Setup” (vpage110).
•When setting manually, check the setting contents with the network
administrator.
NOTE
•A contract with an ISP is required to connect to the Internet.
No additional contract is needed if you already have a broadband
connection to the Internet.
•The types of routers that can be used depend on the ISP. Contact an
ISP or a computer shop for details.
•DENON assumes no responsibility whatsoever for any
communication errors or troubles resulting from customer’s
network environment or connected devices.
•This unit is not compatible with PPPoE. A PPPoE-compatible router
is required if you have a contract for a type of line set by PPPoE.
•Do not connect an ETHERNET connector directly to the LAN port/
Ethernet connector on your computer.
•To listen to audio streaming, use a router that supports audio
streaming.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Basic version
20
Connecting an external control device
REMOTE CONTROL jacks
If this unit is installed in a location that is out of range of the signal
from the remote control unit, you can still operate the unit and the
devices connected to it by using a commercially available IR receiver.
You can also use it to remotely control ZONE2, ZONE3 (another room).
AUX
OUT
Device equipped with a
REMOTE CONTROL IN jack
Infrared
retransmitter
Infrared
sensor
Output
Input
RS-232C connector
When you connect an external control device, you can control this unit
with the external control device.
External serial controller
Perform the operation below beforehand.
q Turn on the power of this unit.
w Turn off the power of this unit from the external controller.
e Check that the unit is in the standby mode.
TRIGGER OUT jacks
When a device with TRIGGER IN jack is connected, the connected
device’s power on/standby can be controlled through linked operation
to this unit.
The TRIGGER OUT jack outputs a maximum 12 V/150 mA electrical
signal.
12 V/150 mA trigger-compatible device
Set to change the conditions for linked operation via the TRIGGER
OUT 1 or 2 jack.
“Trigger Out 1” or “Trigger Out 2” (vpage116)
in Set as Necessary
NOTE
•Use the monaural mini-plug cable for connecting TRIGGER OUT
jacks. Do not use the stereo mini-plug cable.
•If the permissible trigger input level for the connected device is larger
than 12 V/150 mA, or has shorted, the TRIGGER OUT jack cannot be
used. In this case, turn off the power to the unit, and disconnect it.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Basic version
21
The acoustic characteristics of the connected speakers and
listening room are measured and the optimum settings are made
automatically. This is called “Audyssey
®
Auto Setup”.
To perform measurement, place the setup microphone in
multiple locations all around the listening area. For best results,
we recommend you measure in six or more positions, as shown
in the illustration (up to eight positions).
•When performing Audyssey
®
Auto Setup, Audyssey MultEQ
®
XT/
Audyssey Dynamic EQ
®
/Audyssey Dynamic Volume
®
functions
become active (vpage100).
•To set up the speakers manually, use “Speaker Setup”
(vpage104) on the menu.
NOTE
•Make the room as quiet as possible. Background noise can disrupt
the room measurements. Close windows, silence cell phones,
televisions, radios, air conditioners, fluorescent lights, home
appliances, light dimmers, or other devices as measurements may
be affected by these sounds.
•Cell phones should be placed away from all audio electronics during
the measurement process as Radio Frequency Interference (RFI)
may cause measurement disruptions (even if the cell phone is not
in use).
•Do not unplug the setup microphone from the main unit until
Audyssey
®
Auto Setup is completed.
•Do not stand between the speakers and setup microphone or allow
obstacles in the path while the measurements are being made. This
will cause inaccurate readings.
•Loud test sounds may be played during Audyssey
®
Auto setup. This
is part of normal operation. If there is background noise in room,
these test signals will increase in volume.
•Operating
M df during the measurements
will cancel the measurements.
•Measurement cannot be performed when
headphones are connected.
Settings
Here, we explain “Audyssey
®
Auto Setup”, which allows you to
automatically make the optimal settings for your speakers, and
“Network Setup”, which allows you to connect this unit to a home
network (LAN).
This unit lets you play via your home network (LAN) music files stored
on a computer and music content such as that from Internet radio.
Selecting a listening mode (SURROUND MODE)
(vpage53)
Playback (Basic operation) (vpage28)
n Set up speakers (Audyssey
®
Auto Setup)
(vpage21)
n Making the network settings (Network Setup)
(vpage27)
Playback (Advanced operation) (vpage70)
Set up speakers (Audyssey
®
Auto Setup)
About setup microphone placement
•Measurements are performed by placing the setup microphone
successively at multiple positions throughout the entire listening
area, as shown in GExample qH. For best results, we recommend
you measure in six or more positions, as shown in the illustration
(up to eight positions).
•Even if the listening environment is small as shown in GExample wH,
measuring at multiple points throughout the listening environment
results in more effective correction.
FL SW C FR
SR
SBL SBR
SL
*
M
FL SW C FR
SR
SBL SBR
SL
*
M
(
: Measuring positions)
GExample qH GExample wH
(
: Measuring positions)
FL Front speaker (L) SL Surround speaker (L)
FR Front speaker (R) SR Surround speaker (R)
C Center speaker SBL Surround back speaker (L)
SW Subwoofer SBR Surround back speaker (R)
About the main listening position (*M)
The main listening position is the position where listeners would
normally sit or where one would normally sit alone within the listening
environment. Before starting Audyssey
®
Auto Setup, place the setup
microphone in the main listening position. Audyssey MultEQ
®
XT uses
the measurements from this position to calculate speaker distance,
level, polarity, and the optimum crossover value for the subwoofer.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Basic version
vSee overleaf
22
2
Set up the subwoofer
If using a subwoofer capable of the following
adjustments, set up the subwoofer as shown below.
n When using a subwoofer with a direct mode
Set the direct mode to “On” and disable the volume adjustment
and crossover frequency setting.
n When using a subwoofer without a direct mode
Make the following settings:
•Volume : “12 o’clock position”
•Crossover frequency : “Maximum/Highest Frequency”
•Low pass filter : “Off”
•Standby mode : “Off”
NOTE
When you use two subwoofers, please adjust the subwoofer
volume controls individually so that each subwoofer level is as close
as possible to 75 dB using the test tone (vpage 106) before
Audyssey
®
Auto Setup.
1
Set up the microphone
Mount the setup microphone on a tripod or stand
and place it in the main listening position.
When placing the setup microphone, adjust the height of the
sound receptor to the level of the listener’s ear.
Sound receptor
Setup
microphone
If you do not have a tripod or stand, set up the microphone on, for
example, a seat without a back.
NOTE
•Do not hold the setup microphone in your hand during
measurements.
•Avoid placing the setup microphone close to a seat back or wall as
sound reflections may give inaccurate results.
Set up speakers (Audyssey
®
Auto Setup)
3
Set up the remote control unit
n Set up the zone mode
Press ZONE SELECT to switch the zone mode to
J (MAIN ZONE).
The J indicator lights.
Press ZONE SELECT
n Set up the operation mode
Press AMP to set the remote control unit to AMP-
operation mode.
Press AMP
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Basic version
vSee overleaf
23
STEP 1
Preparation
STEP 2
Detection & Measurement (Main)
Set up speakers (Audyssey
®
Auto Setup)
4
Connect the setup microphone to the SETUP MIC
jack of this unit.
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP
1 2 3 4 5 6
Amp Assign
RETURN
Auto Setup Start
Channel Select
STEP1 Preparation
Connect the speakers and place them according
to the recommendations in the manual,
Set the following items
If necessary.
Start Auto Setup
Enter Cancel
When the setup microphone is
connected, the following screen is
displayed.
Here, we explain setup using the example of 7.1-channel speaker
playback using surround back speakers.
For setup of surround speaker systems other than 7.1-channels,
follows steps 3 and 4 in “Set up “Amp Assign”” (vpage67).
If unused channels are set with “Channel Select”, measuring time
can be shortened. For setting, perform steps 6 to 12 of “Set up
“Channel Select”” (vpage68).
5
Use i to select “Auto Setup
Start” and then press ENTER.
NOTE
If “Caution!” is displayed:
Go to “Error messages” (vpage 26),
check any related items, and perform the
necessary procedures.
If the problem is resolved, return and restart
“Audyssey
®
Auto Setup”.
When performing Audyssey
®
Auto Setup over
again
Press ui to select “Retry”, and then press ENTER.
When measuring has stopped
q Press RETURN B, to the “Cancel auto setup?” prompt is
displayed.
w Press o to select “Yes”, then press ENTER.
Setting up the speakers again
Repeat the operation from step 4 of
STEP 1 Preparation
.
•In STEP 2, you will perform measurements at the main listening
position.
•This step automatically checks the speaker configuration and speaker
size, and calculates the channel level, distance, and crossover
frequency.
It also corrects distortion in the listening area.
6
Select “Measure” and then press ENTER.
When measuring begins, a test tone is output from each
speaker.
•Measurement requires several minutes.
7
The detected speakers are displayed.
•The illustration below shows an example of when the front
speakers, center speaker, subwoofer, and surround speakers have
been detected.
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP
1 2 3 4 5 6
RETURN
Next Measurement
Retry
STEP2 Speaker Detection Check
Proceed to next after checking speaker connection result
Enter Cancel
Front
Center
Subwoofer
Surround
Surround Back
Front Height
Front Wide
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2spkrs
No
No
NOTE
If a connected speaker is not displayed, the speaker may not be
connected correctly. Check the speaker connection.
8
Use i to select “Next → Measurement” and then
press ENTER.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Basic version
vSee overleaf
24
STEP 4
Calculation
Set up speakers (Audyssey
®
Auto Setup)
10
Repeat step 9, measuring positions 3 to 8.
When measurement of position 8 is completed, a
“Measurements finished.” message is displayed.
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP
1 2 3 4 5 6
RETURN
Next Calculation
Retry
STEP3 Measurement (Finish)
Proceed to next (Calculation)
Enter Cancel
Measurements finished.
11
On the
STEP 3
screen, use ui to select “Next
Calculation”, and then press ENTER.
Measuring results are analyzed, and the frequency response of
each speaker in the listening room is determined.
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP
1 2 3 4 5 6
STEP4 Calculation
Now calculating...Please wait.
20%
•Analysis takes several minutes to complete. The time required for
this analysis depends on the number of speakers connected.
The more connected speakers there are, the longer it takes to
perform analysis.
STEP 3
Measurement (2nd – 8th)
•In STEP 3, you will perform measurements at multiple positions (two
to eight positions) other than the main listening position.
•Just one position can be measured but measuring multiple positions
increases the accuracy of the correction of acoustic distortion within
the listening area.
9
Move the setup microphone to
position 2, use ui to select
“Measure”, and then press
ENTER.
The measurement of the second
position starts. Measurements can be
made in up to eight positions.
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP
1 2 3 4 5 6
RETURN
Next Calculation
Measure
STEP3 Measurement (2nd)
Start measurement. Output large test tone during measuring
Enter Cancel
Please place the microphone at ear
height at 2nd Iistening position.
If you want to omit measurements from the next position onward,
select “Next Calculation”.
(Go to
STEP4 Calculation
)
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Basic version
vSee overleaf
25
Set up speakers (Audyssey
®
Auto Setup)
14
Select “Store” and then press ENTER.
Save the measurement results.
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP
1 2 3 4 5 6
STEP6 Store
Now storing...Please wait.
20%
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP
1 2 3 4 5 6
RETURN
Store
STEP6 Store
Apply and store measurement result
Enter Cancel
Press “Store” to store calculation results.
•Saving the results requires about 10 seconds.
•If the measuring results are not to be saved, press RETURN B.
A message “Cancel auto setup?” will be displayed. Press o then
select “Yes”. All the measured Audyssey
®
Auto Setup data will
be erased.
•During saving of measurements results, “Now storing...Please
wait.” is displayed. When saving is completed, “Storing complete.
Auto Setup is now finished.” is displayed.
NOTE
During saving of measurement results, be sure not to turn off the
power.
15
Unplug the setup microphone from the unit’s SETUP
MIC jack.
16
Set Audyssey Dynamic Volume
®
.
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP
1 2 3 4 5 6
No
Yes
Finish
Turn Dynamic Volume off and exit Auto Setup
Exit
Storing complete.
Auto Setup is now finished.
Please unplug microphone.
Turn on Dynamic Volume?
•This feature adjusts the output volume to the optimal level while
constantly monitoring the level of the audio input to the unit.
Optimal volume control is performed automatically without any
loss in the dynamism and clarity of the sound when, for example,
the volume suddenly increases for commercials shown during
television programs.
n When turning Dynamic Volume
®
on
•Use u to select “Yes”, and then press ENTER.
The unit automatically enters “Evening” mode.
n When turning Dynamic Volume
®
off
•Use i to select “No”, and then press ENTER.
NOTE
After performing Audyssey
®
Auto Setup, do not change the speaker
connections or subwoofer volume. In event of a change, perform
Audyssey
®
Auto Setup again.
STEP 6
Store
Finish
STEP 5
Check
12
Use ui to select the item you
want to check, and then press
ENTER.
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP
1 2 3 4 5 6
RETURN
Next Store
Crossover Freq. Check
Speaker Config. Check
Distance Check
Channel Level Check
STEP5 Check
Proceed to next (Store)
Enter Cancel
Check processing results.
To proceed, press “Next”.
•Subwoofers may measure a greater reported distance than
the actual distance due to added electrical delay common in
subwoofers.
•If you want to check another item, press RETURN B.
13
Use i to select “Next Store” and then press
ENTER.
NOTE
•If the result differs from the actual connection status, or if “Caution!”
is displayed, see “Error messages” (vpage 26). Then carry out
Audyssey
®
Auto Setup again.
• If you change speaker positions or orientation, perform Audyssey
®
Auto Setup again to find the optimal equalizer settings.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Basic version
26
Error messages
NOTE
•An error message is displayed if Audyssey
®
Auto Setup could not be completed due to speaker placement, the measurement environment, etc. If this happens, check the relevant items, be sure to take the necessary
measures, then perform Audyssey
®
Auto Setup over again.
•If the result still differs from the actual connection status after remeasurement or the error message still appears, it is possible that the speakers are not connected properly. Turn this unit off, check the speaker
connections and repeat the measurement process from the beginning.
•Be sure to turn off the power before checking speaker connections.
Examples Error details Measures
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP
RETURN
Retry
No microphone or speaker
Cancel
Caution!
•The connected setup microphone is broken, or a device other than the
supplied setup microphone is connected.
•Not all speakers could be detected.
•The front L speaker was not properly detected.
•Connect the included setup microphone to the SETUP MIC jack of this unit.
•Check the speaker connections.
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP
RETURN
Retry
Ambient noise is too high
or level is too low
Cancel
Caution!
•There is too much noise in the room for accurate measurements to be
made.
•Speaker or subwoofer sound is too low for accurate measurements to be
made.
•Either turn off any device generating noise or move it away.
•Perform again when the surroundings are quieter.
•Check the speaker installation and the direction in which the speakers are
facing.
•Adjust the subwoofer’s volume.
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP
1 2 3 4 5 6
RETURN
Retry
Front R None
Cancel
Caution!
•The displayed speaker could not be detected.
(The screen on the left indicates that the front right speaker cannot be
detected.)
•Check the connections of the displayed speaker.
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP
1 2 3 4 5 6
RETURN
Retry
Skip
Front R Phase
Cancel
Caution!
•The displayed speaker is connected with the polarity reversed.
(The screen on the left indicates that the polarity phases of the front right
speakers are reversed.)
•Check the polarity of the displayed speaker.
•For some speakers, this error message may be
displayed even if the speaker is properly connected.
If you are sure the connection is correct, press ui
to select “Skip”, then press ENTER.
Set up speakers (Audyssey
®
Auto Setup)
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Basic version
27
Parameter Check
This function enables you to check the measurement results and equalizer characteristics after Audyssey
®
Auto Setup.
1
Use ui to select “Parameter Check” and then press ENTER.
SPEAKER SETUP
Auto Setup
Amp Assign
Speaker Config.
Bass Setting
Distance
Channel Level
Audyssey Auto Setup
Parameter Check
Check auto setup measurement results
2
Use ui to select the item you want to check, then press ENTER or p.
Measurement results for each speaker are displayed.
Speaker Config. Check
Check the speaker configuration.
Distance Check
Check the distance.
Channel Level Check
Check the channel level.
Crossover Freq. Check
Check the crossover frequency.
EQ Check
Check the equalizer.
•If “EQ Check” is selected, press ui to select equalizing curve (“Audyssey” or “Audyssey Flat”) to
be checked.
Use ui to switch the display between the different speakers.
3
Press RETURN B.
The confirmation screen reappears. Repeat step 2.
Retrieving Audyssey
®
Auto Setup settings
If you set “Restore” to “Yes”, you can return to Audyssey
®
Auto Setup measurement result (value
calculated at the start by MultEQ
®
XT) even when you have changed each setting manually.
Set up speakers (Audyssey
®
Auto Setup)
Making the network settings
(Network Setup)
This unit can be connected to a home network (LAN) to listen to Internet radio or play back music files and
still image (JPEG) files stored on a computer.
1
Connect the Ethernet cable (vpage 19 “Connecting to a home network (LAN)”).
2
Turn on this unit (C page 5 “Getting Started”).
This unit performs automatic network setup due to the DHCP function.
When connecting to a network that has no DHCP function, perform the setting in “Network
Connecting” (vpage110).
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Basic version
28
Playback (Basic operation)
n Playing a Blu-ray Disc player/DVD player
(vpage30)
n Playing a CD player (vpage30)
n Playing an iPod (vpage31)
n Tuning in radio stations (vpage35)
n Playing a network audio (vpage39)
n Playing a USB memory device (vpage51)
Selecting a listening mode (SURROUND MODE)
(vpage53)
n Selecting the input source (vpage28)
n Adjusting the master volume (vpage29)
n Turning off the sound temporarily (vpage29)
Playback (Advanced operation) (vpage70)
Settings (vpage21)
Important information
Before starting playback, make the connections between the different
devices and the settings on the unit.
NOTE
Also refer to the operating instructions of the connected devices
when playing them.
Selecting the input source
Press the input source select button
(BD, SAT/CBL, TV, NET/USB, DVD,
V.AUX, DOCK, TUNER, GAME1,
GAME2, DVR, CD or PHONO) to be
played back.
The desired input source can be selected
directly.
You can also use the following operation to select an input
source.
nUsing the knob on the main unit
Turn SOURCE SELECT.
•Turning SOURCE SELECT switches the input source, as shown
below.
BD DVD TV SAT/CBL
GAME1GAME2 DVRV.AUX
CDPHONOTUNER
NET/USB DOCK
•When iPod 1 on the main unit is pressed, the input source of this
unit is switched to “DOCK” or “NET/USB” and the connected
iPod is automatically played (vpage34 “iPod play function”).
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Basic version
BD
vSee overleaf
29
nUsing the “SOURCE SELECT” menu
Switch the remote control unit to the J (MAIN ZONE) mode when
performing this operation (vpage120 “Operating AV devices”).
If the remote control unit is in K (ZONE2) or L (ZONE3) mode,
the “SOURCE SELECT” menu will not be displayed when SOURCE
SELECT
is pressed.
BD
Recent
Player
Video
Network
Tuner
SOURCE SELECT
Source
The currently selected input
source is highlighted.
q Input Source
The name of the highlighted input source is displayed.
w Recently used sources
The recently used input sources (up to five) are displayed.
e Icons for the input sources in the different categories are
displayed.
q Press SOURCE SELECT.
Display the “SOURCE SELECT” menu.
w Use uio p to select the input source,
then press ENTER.
The input source is set and the source
selection menu is turned off.
•When using with an iPod connected directly to the USB port of this
unit, select “ (USB/iPod)” for the input source.
•Input sources that are not going to be used can be set ahead of time.
Make this setting at “Source Delete” (vpage115).
•To turn off the source selection menu without selecting an input
source, press SOURCE SELECT again.
•When SOURCE SELECT is pressed, the AMP-operation mode starts
automatically (vpage120).
Adjusting the master volume
Use M df to adjust the volume.
n When the “Volume Display” setting
(vpage115) is “Relative”
GAdjustable rangeH
– – –
–80.5dB – 18.0dB
n When the “Volume Display” setting (vpage115) is
“Absolute”
GAdjustable rangeH
0.0 – 99.0
•The variable range differs according to the input signal and channel
level setting.
You can also operate via the main unit. In this case, perform the
following operations.
Turn MASTER VOLUME to adjust the volume.
Turning off the sound temporarily
Press N.
•The power indicator flashes green.
•“MUTE” indicator on the display lights.
•
appears on a TV screen.
•The sound is reduced to the level set at “Mute Level” (vpage115).
•To cancel, press N again. Muting can also be canceled by adjusting
the master volume.
Important information
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Basic version
BD
30
Playing a Blu-ray Disc player/DVD
player
The following describes the procedure for playing Blu-ray Disc player/
DVD player.
1
Prepare for playback.
q Turn on the power of the TV,
subwoofer and player.
w Change the TV input to the input of
this unit.
e Load the disc in the player.
2
Press ON to turn on power to the
unit.
3
Press BD or DVD to switch an input source for a
player used for playback.
4
Play the device connected to this unit.
Make the necessary settings on the player (language setting,
subtitles setting, etc.) beforehand.
Playing a CD player
The following describes the procedure for playing CD player.
1
Prepare for playback.
q Turn on the power of the subwoofer
and player.
w Load the disc in the player.
2
Press ON to turn on power to the
unit.
3
Press CD to switch the input
source to the CD player.
4
Play the device connected to this unit.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Basic version
BD
31
Playing an iPod
There are two methods for iPod playback.
q Use a DENON control dock for iPod to play back.
You can play back both video, photo and audio.
w Connect an iPod directly to the USB port to play back
(vpage33).
You can play back audio only.
q
Use a DENON control dock for iPod to
play back
If you use a separately sold DENON control dock for iPod (ASD-1R or
ASD-11R), you will be able to play back videos, photos, music, and
other content on the iPod.
nListening to music on an iPod
1
Prepare for playback.
q Connect the DENON control dock
for iPod to this unit (vpage14
“Connecting a control dock for
iPod”).
w Set the iPod in the DENON control
dock for iPod.
2
Press ON to turn on power to the
unit.
3
Press DOCK to switch the input
source to “DOCK”.
•If ”Browse mode” is selected in step
4, the following screen is displayed on a
TV screen, depending on the connected
control dock for iPod.
Music
Playlists
Artists
[1/6]
Albums
Songs
Genres
Composers
iPod
Music
Videos
[1/2]
(When using an ASD-1R) (When using an ASD-11R)
•In “Browse mode”, the iPod display is as
shown at right.
NOTE
If the connections screen is not displayed,
the iPod may not be properly connected.
Reconnect it.
OK to disconnect.
4
Press SEARCH and hold it down for 2 seconds or
more to select the display mode.
•There are two modes for displaying the contents recorded on the
iPod.
Browse mode
Display iPod information on the TV screen.
•English letters, numbers and certain symbols are displayed.
Incompatible characters are displayed as “.” (period).
Remote mode
Display iPod information on the iPod screen.
•“Remote iPod” is displayed on the display of this unit.
Display mode
Browse mode Remote mode
Playable
files
Music file
P P
Photo file
P
z2
Video file
P
z1
P
z2
Active
buttons
Remote
control unit
(This unit)
P P
iPod
P
z1 When using an ASD-11R DENON control dock for iPod.
z2 Video may not be output, depending on the combination of
ASD-1R or ASD-11R DENON control dock for iPod and iPod.
5
Use ui to select the item, then press ENTER or p
to select the le to be played.
6
Press ENTER, p or 1.
Playback starts.
•You can specify the duration of the on-screen display to be displayed
(default: 30 sec) at menu “iPod” (vpage116). Press uio p to
return to the original screen.
•To play back compressed audio with extended bass or treble
reproduction, we recommend playback in RESTORER mode
(vpage102). The default setting is “Mode3”.
•In Browse mode, press STATUS on the main unit during playback
to check the title name, artist name, and album name on the display
of this unit.
NOTE
•Press STANDBY and set this unit’s power to
the standby mode before disconnecting the
iPod. You can also switch the input source
to other than “DOCK” and then disconnect
the iPod.
•Depending on the type of iPod and the software version, some
functions may not operate.
•Note that DENON will accept no responsibility whatsoever for any
problems arising with the data on an iPod when using this unit in
conjunction with the iPod.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Basic version
vSee overleaf
BD
32
nViewing videos on an iPod in the Browse mode
When an iPod equipped with a video function is connected to a
DENON ASD-11R control dock for iPod, image files can be played
in the Browse mode.
1
Use ui to select “Videos”, then
press ENTER or p.
2
Use ui to select the search item
or folder, then press ENTER or
p.
3
Use ui to select the video le,
then press ENTER, p or 1.
Playback starts.
Playing an iPod
nViewing photos and videos on an iPod in the
Remote mode
This unit can play back on a TV screen photos and data stored on an
iPod equipped with a slide show or video function.
1
Press and hold SEARCH to set the
Remote mode.
“Remote iPod” is displayed on the
display of this unit.
2
Watching the iPod’s screen,
use ui to select “Photos” or
“Videos”.
•Depending on the iPod model, it may be necessary to operate the
iPod unit directly.
3
Press ENTER until the image you want to view is
displayed.
“TV Out” at the iPod’s “Slide show Settings” or “Video Settings”
must be set to “On” in order to display the iPod’s photo data or videos
on the monitor. For details, see the iPod’s operating instructions.
NOTE
Video may not be output, depending on the combination of ASD-1R or
ASD-11R and iPod.
niPod operation
Operation buttons Function
MENU Amp menu
uio p
Cursor operation /
Auto search (cue, ui) /
Manual search (Press and hold, ui)
ENTER
(Press and release)
Enter / Pause
ENTER
(Press and hold)
Stop
SEARCH
(Press and release)
Page search mode
z
SEARCH
(Press and hold)
Browse / Remote mode switching
RETURN B
Return
6 7
(Press and hold)
Manual search
(fast-reverse/fast-forward)
1
Playback / Pause
8 9
Auto search (cue)
3
Pause
2
Stop
TV Z / X
TV power on/standby (Default : SONY)
TV INPUT Switch TV input (Default : SONY)
•Repeat playback (vpage94 “Repeat”)
•Shuffling playback (vpage94 “Shuffle”)
z When the menu screen is displayed, press
SEARCH, then press o
(previous page) or p (next page).
To cancel, press ui or SEARCH.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Basic version
BD
33
w
Connect an iPod directly to the USB port
to play back
You can use the USB cable provided with the iPod to connect the iPod
with the unit’s USB port and enjoy music stored on the iPod.
•This unit supports audio playback from the iPod (fifth generation
or later), iPod nano, iPod classic, iPod touch and iPhone (it is not
compatible with iPod shuffle).
1
Connect the iPod to the USB port (vpage 15
“Connecting an iPod or USB memory device to the
USB port”).
2
Press ON to turn on power to the unit.
3
Press NET/USB to switch the input source to “NET/
USB”.
DENON:[AVR-3312]
Favorites
Internet Radio
Flickr
Last.fm
Napster
Media Server
iPod
[1/7]
CH +/-
Preset
4
Use ui to select “iPod”, then
press ENTER or p.
iPod
Playlists
Artists
Podcasts
Genres
Composers
Albums
Songs
[1/8]
SEARCH
P/Search
NOTE
If the “iPod” is not displayed, the iPod may not be properly
connected. Reconnect it.
Playing an iPod
5
Press SEARCH and hold it down for 2 seconds or
more to select the display mode.
•There are two modes for displaying the contents recorded on the
iPod.
Browse mode
Display iPod information on the TV screen.
•English letters, numbers and certain symbols are displayed.
Incompatible characters are displayed as “.” (period).
Remote mode
Display iPod information on the iPod screen.
•“Remote iPod” is displayed on the display of this unit.
•The Remote mode is not supported on fifth generation iPod or
first generation iPod nano.
Display mode
Browse mode Remote mode
Playable
files
Music file
P P
Video file
z
Active
buttons
Remote
control unit
(This unit)
P P
iPod
P
z Only the sound is played.
6
Use ui to select the item, then press ENTER or p
to select the le to be played.
7
Press ENTER, p or 1.
Playback starts.
•You can specify the duration of the on-screen display to be displayed
(default: 30 sec) at menu “iPod” (vpage 116). Press uio p
to return to the original screen.
•To play back compressed audio with extended bass or treble
reproduction, we recommend playback in RESTORER mode
(vpage102). The default setting is “Mode3”.
•In Browse mode, press STATUS on the main unit during playback to
check the title name, artist name, and album name.
NOTE
•Depending on the type of iPod and the software version, some
functions may not operate.
•Note that DENON will accept no responsibility whatsoever for any
problems arising with the data on an iPod when using this unit in
conjunction with the iPod.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Basic version
vSee overleaf
BD
34
Playing an iPod
niPod operation
Operation buttons Function
MENU Amp menu
uio p
Cursor operation /
Auto search (cue, ui) /
Manual search (Press and hold, ui)
ENTER
(Press and release)
Enter / Pause
ENTER
(Press and hold)
Stop
SEARCH
(Press and release)
Page search
z1
/ Character sort
z2
SEARCH
(Press and hold)
Browse / Remote mode switching
RETURN B
Return
6 7
(Press and hold)
Manual search
(fast-reverse/fast-forward)
1
Playback / Pause
8 9
Auto search (cue)
3
Pause
2
Stop
TV Z / X
TV power on/standby (Default : SONY)
TV INPUT Switch TV input (Default : SONY)
•Repeat playback (vpage94 “Repeat”)
•Random playback (vpage94 “Shuffle”)
z
1
When the menu screen is displayed, press SEARCH, then press
o (previous page) or p (next page).
To cancel, press ui or SEARCH twice.
z2 When the menu screen is displayed, press SEARCH twice, then
press o p to select the first letter you want to search mode.
•If it is not possible to search the list, “unsorted list...” is
displayed.
To cancel, press ui or SEARCH.
If the list is not in alphabetical order, you may not be able to perform
a character sort.
iPod play function
If iPod 1 on the main unit is pressed when a control dock for iPod or
an iPod (USB) is connected, the iPod starts playback.
Press iPod 1.
•This unit’s input source switches to
“DOCK” or “NET/USB”.
•iPod playback starts.
NOTE
If both a control dock for iPod (“DOCK”) and an iPod (“NET/USB”)
are connected, playback with control dock for iPod (“DOCK”) takes
priority.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Basic version
BD
35
Tuning in radio stations
Listening to FM/AM broadcasts
1
Press TUNER to switch the input source to
“TUNER”.
2
Press BAND to select “FM” or “AM”.
FM
When listening to an FM broadcast.
AM
When listening to an AM broadcast.
TUNER
CH A
MEMORY
Memory
SEARCH
Search
Now Playing
BandTuning
AUTO
Mode
Preset
CH+/-
FM 87.50MHz
3
Tune in the desired broadcast station.
q To tune in automatically (Auto tuning)
Press MODE to light the “AUTO” indicator on the display, then
use TUNING d or TUNING f to select the station you want to
hear.
w To tune in manually (Manual tuning)
Press MODE to turn off the display’s “AUTO” indicator, then use
TUNING d or TUNING f to select the station you want to hear.
•If the desired station cannot be tuned in with auto tuning, tune it in
manually.
•When tuning in stations manually, press and hold TUNING d or
TUNING f to change frequencies continuously.
•The time (default : 30 sec) for which the menu are displayed can be
set at menu “Tuner” (vpage 116). Press uio p to return to
the original screen.
nPresetting radio stations (Manual preset)
Your favorite broadcast stations can be preset so that you can tune
them in easily. Up to 56 stations can be preset.
•Stations can be preset automatically at “Auto Preset”
(vpage94). If “Auto Preset” is performed after performing
“Manual preset”, the “Manual preset” settings will be overwritten.
1
Tune in the broadcast station you want to preset.
TUNER
CH A
MEMORY
Memory
SEARCH
Search
Now Playing
BandTuning
AUTO
Mode
Preset
CH+/-
FM 87.50MHz
2
Press MEMORY.
TUNER
CH A
MEMORY
Memory
SEARCH
Search
Now Playing
BandTuning
Preset
CH+/-
FM 97.90MHz
ST.Name HD1
Song Title
AUTO
Mode
To store preset:
Select A1-G8
SHIFT CH+/- MEMORY
A1
3
Press SHIFT to select the block (A to G) in which the
channel (1 to 8 per a block) is to be preset, then press
CH +, CH – or 1 – 8 to select the preset number.
4
Press MEMORY again to complete the setting.
•To preset other stations, repeat steps 1 to 4.
Default settings
Block (A – G)
and
Channel (1 – 8)
Default Settings
A1 – A8
87.50 / 89.10 / 98.10 / 108.00 / 90.10 / 90.10 /
90.10 / 90.10 MHz
B1 – B8
522 / 603 / 999 / 1404 / 1611 kHz,
90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 MHz
C1 – C8 90.10 MHz
D1 – D8 90.10 MHz
E1 – E8 90.10 MHz
F1 – F8 90.10 MHz
G1 – G8 90.10 MHz
Specify a name for the preset broadcast station
(Preset Name) (vpage95)
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Basic version
vSee overleaf
BD
36
Tuning in radio stations
nListening to preset stations
1
Press SHIFT to select the memory
block (A to G).
TUNER
CH A
MEMORY
Memory
SEARCH
Search
BandTuning
Preset
CH+/-
FM 97.90MHz
ST.Name HD1
Song Title
Artist Name
Program Type
STEREO
Mode
A8 FM 90.10MHz
A7 FM 90.10MHz
A6 FM 90.10MHz
A5 FM 90.10MHz
A4 FM 108.00MHz
A3 FM 98.10MHz
A2 FM 89.10MHz
A1 FM 87.50MHz
Preset Channel
2
Press CH +, CH – or 1 – 8 to select the desired preset
channel.
You can also operate via the main unit. In this case, perform the
following operations.
Press TUNER PRESET CH + or TUNER PRESET CH – to select a preset
radio station.
nDirect frequency tuning
You can enter the receiving frequency directly to tune in.
1
Press SEARCH.
TUNER
CH A
MEMORY
Memory
SEARCH
Search
Now Playing
BandTuning
Preset
CH+/-
FM ---.--MHz
DIRECT TUNE
AUTO
Input
0-9
2
Input frequencies using the 09.
•If o is pressed, the immediately preceding input is cancelled.
3
When setting is completed, press ENTER.
The preset frequency is tuned in.
RDS (Radio Data System)
Note that the RDS function only works when receiving RDS compatible
stations.
RDS (works only on the FM band) is a broadcasting service which
allows a station to send additional information along with the regular
radio program signal.
NOTE
The operations described as follows using
SEARCH will not function in areas in which
there are no RDS broadcasts.
nRDS search
Use this function to automatically tune to FM stations that provide
the RDS service.
1
Press TUNER to switch the input
source to “TUNER”.
2
Press SEARCH to select “RDS”.
TUNER
CH A
MEMORY
Memory
SEARCH
Search
Now Playing
BandTuning
Preset
CH+/-
FM 97.90MHz
ST.Name HD1
Song Title
Artist Name
Program Type
AUTO
STEREO
Mode
RDS station
Program category
Traffic info
Radio text
RDS
PTY
TP
RT
RDS
SEARCH CH+/-
Search mode
A1 FM 87.50MHz
Tuning
3
Press CH + or CH –.
The search for RDS stations begins automatically.
•If no RDS stations are found with the above operation, all the
reception bands are searched.
•When a broadcast station is found, that station’s name appears on
the display.
•If no RDS station is found when all the frequencies have been
searched, “NO RDS” is displayed.
If you press CH + or CH – within 5 seconds after the broadcast station
name is shown on the display, you can search for a different station.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Basic version
BD
37
Tuning in radio stations
PTY (Program Type)
PTY identifies the type of RDS program.
The program types and their displays are as follows:
NEWS News WEATHER Weather
AFFAIRS Current Affairs FINANCE Finance
INFO Information
CHILDREN
Children’s
program
SPORT Sports
EDUCATE Education SOCIAL Social Affairs
DRAMA Drama RELIGION Religion
CULTURE Culture PHONE IN Phone In
SCIENCE Science TRAVEL Travel
VARIED Varied LEISURE Leisure
POP M Pop Music JAZZ Jazz Music
ROCK M Rock Music COUNTRY Country Music
EASY M
Easy Listening
Music
NATION M National Music
OLDIES Oldies Music
LIGHT M Light Classical FOLK M Folk Music
CLASSICS Serious Classical DOCUMENT Documentary
OTHER M Other Music
nPTY search
Use this function to find RDS stations broadcasting a designated
program type (PTY).
1
Press TUNER to switch the input
source to “TUNER”.
2
Press SEARCH to select “PTY”.
TUNER
CH A
MEMORY
Memory
SEARCH
Search
Now Playing
BandTuning
Preset
CH+/-
FM 97.90MHz
ST.Name HD1
Song Title
Artist Name
Program Type
AUTO
STEREO
Mode
NEWS
AFFAIRS
INFO
SPORT
EDUCATE
DRAMA
RDS
PTY
TP
RT
Program category
SEARCH CH+/-
Search mode
A1 FM 87.50MHz
Tuning
3
Watching the display, press ui to call out the
desired program type.
4
Press CH + or CH –.
PTY search begins automatically.
•If there is no station broadcasting the designated program type
with the above operation, all the reception bands are searched.
•The station name is displayed on the display after searching stops.
•If no station broadcasting the designated program type is found
when all the frequencies have been searched, “NO PROGRAMME”
is displayed.
If you press CH + or CH – within 5 seconds after the broadcast station
name is shown on the display, you can search for a different station.
TP (Traffic Program)
TP identifies programs that carry traffic announcements.
This allows you to easily find out the latest traffic conditions in your
area before leaving home.
nTP search
Use this function to find RDS stations broadcasting traffic programs
(TP stations).
1
Press TUNER to switch the input
source to “TUNER”.
2
Press SEARCH to select “TP”.
TUNER
CH A
MEMORY
Memory
SEARCH
Search
Now Playing
BandTuning
Preset
CH+/-
FM 97.90MHz
ST.Name HD1
Song Title
Artist Name
Program Type
AUTO
STEREO
Mode
RDS station
Program category
Traffic info
Radio text
RDS
PTY
TP
RT
RDS
SEARCH CH+/-
Search mode
A1 FM 87.50MHz
Tuning
3
Press CH + or CH –.
TP search begins automatically.
•If no TP station is found with the above operation, all the reception
bands are searched.
•The station name is displayed on the display after searching stops.
•If no other TP station is found when all the frequencies have been
searched, “NO PROGRAMME” is displayed.
If you press CH + or CH – within 5 seconds after the broadcast station
name is shown on the display, you can search for a different station.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Basic version
BD
38
Tuning in radio stations
RT (Radio Text)
RT allows RDS stations to send text messages that appear on the
display.
“RT” appears on the display when radio text data is received.
1
Press TUNER to switch the input
source to “TUNER”.
2
Press SEARCH to select “RT”.
TUNER
CH A
MEMORY
Memory
SEARCH
Search
Now Playing
BandTuning
Preset
CH+/-
FM 97.90MHz
ST.Name HD1
Song Title
Artist Name
Program Type
AUTO
STEREO
Mode
RDS station
Program category
Traffic info
Radio text ON
RDS
PTY
TP
RT
RDS
A1 FM 87.50MHz
•While receiving an RDS broadcast station, the text data broadcast
from the station is displayed.
•To turn the display off, press o p.
•If no text data is being broadcast, “NO TEXT DATA” is displayed.
nTuner (FM/AM) operation
Operation buttons Function
CH +, – Preset channel selection / RDS search
MENU Amp menu
uio p
Cursor operation
ENTER Enter
SEARCH Direct frequency tuning / RDS search
RETURN B
Return
BAND FM/AM switching
MODE Switch search modes
TUNING df
Tuning (up/down)
0 – 9
Preset channel selection (1 – 8) /
Direct frequency tuning (0 – 9)
SHIFT Preset channel block selection
MEMORY Preset memory registration
TV Z / X
TV power on/standby (Default : SONY)
TV INPUT Switch TV input (Default : SONY)
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Basic version
BD
39
Playing a network audio
Follow this procedure to play Internet radio stations or music or still picture (JPEG) files stored on a
computer.
Important information
nAbout the internet radio function
•Internet radio refers to radio broadcasts distributed over the Internet.
Internet radio stations from around the world can be received.
•This unit is equipped with the following Internet radio functions:
•Stations can be selected by genre and location.
•Up to 56 Internet radio stations can be preset.
•Internet radio stations in MP3 and WMA (Windows Media Audio) format can be listened to.
•Your favorite radio stations can be registered by accessing an exclusive DENON Internet radio URL
from a Web browser on a computer.
•The function is managed for individual users, so you must provide your MAC or e-mail address.
Exclusive URL: http://www.radiodenon.com
•The radio station database service may be suspended without notice.
•This unit’s Internet radio station list is created using a radio station database service (vTuner). This
database service provides a list edited and created for this unit.
nMedia player
This function lets you play music files and playlists (m3u, wpl) stored on a computer (media server)
connected to this unit via a network.
With this unit’s network audio playback function, connection to the server is possible using one of the
technologies below.
•Windows Media Player Network Sharing Service
•Windows Media DRM10
Album art function
When a WMA (Windows Media Audio), MP3 or MPEG-4 AAC file includes album art data, the album art
can be displayed while the music files are playing.
If you use Ver.11 or later of Windows Media Player, the album art for WMA files can be displayed.
Slide show function
You can play back image (JPEG) files that are stored in folders on a media server and photographs on Flickr
as a slideshow. Also, you can set the time display that is shown during playback (vpage94).
This unit plays back image (JPEG) files in the orientation in which they are stored in the folder.
n Function that simultaneously plays back music and image files from the network
You can playback music and image files at the same time by playing back music files, and then playing
back image files.
Also, when selecting music files after playing back image files, press SEARCH when the music playback
screen is displayed. Music files and image files can be played back simultaneously. At this time, set
“Slide Show”(vpage94) in the menu to “ON”.
Internet Radio
04:01
100%
MEMORY
Memory
SEARCH
Picture View
Now Playing
MP3 32kbps
CH+/-
Preset
Title
Radio station 
Select
Network contents that can be played back simultaneously are as follows.
•Music files: Favorites, Internet Radio, Media server, USB, iPod Browse Mode (NET/USB)
•Image files: Media server, USB, Flickr
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Basic version
vSee overleaf
BD
40
Playing a network audio
GCompatible formatsH
Internet radio Media server
z1
WMA (Windows Media Audio)
P P
MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3)
P P
WAV
P
MPEG-4 AAC
P
z2
FLAC (Free Lossless Audio Codec)
P
JPEG
P
A server or server software compatible with distribution in the corresponding formats is required to play
music files via a network.
z1 Media server
•This unit is compatible with MP3 ID3-Tag (Ver. 2) standard.
•This unit can show the artwork that was embedded by using MP3 ID3-Tag Ver. 2.3 or 2.4.
•This unit is compatible with WMA META tags.
•WAV format Quantization bit rate: 16 bits
•FLAC format Quantization bit rate: 16 or 24 bits
z2 Only files that are not protected by copyright can be played on this unit.
Content downloaded from pay sites on the Internet are copyright protected. Also, files encoded in
WMA format when ripped from a CD, etc. on a computer may be copyright protected, depending on
the computer’s settings.
GCompatible formatsH
Sampling frequency Bit rate Extension
WMA (Windows Media Audio) 32/44.1/48 kHz 48 – 192 kbps .wma
MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3) 32/44.1/48 kHz 32 – 320 kbps .mp3
WAV 32/44.1/48 kHz .wav
MPEG-4 AAC 32/44.1/48 kHz 16 – 320 kbps
.aac/
.m4a/
.mp4
FLAC (Free Lossless Audio Codec) 32/44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz .flac
nAbout Flickr
Flickr is an online photograph sharing service that started in 2004. You can use the this unit to view
photographs that have been made public by Flickr users. You do not need an account to use Flickr. To
view photographs that you recorded yourself, you need an account in order to upload these photographs
to the Flickr server. For details, see the Flickr homepage.
http://www.flickr.com/
nAbout Last.fm
Last.fm learns what you love... and it’s a great way to discover new music.
Your new DENON AV receiver is very clever. You can create a free Last.fm profile when you start using
your DENON AV receiver and magically keep track of all the songs you hear.
When you sign in at www.last.fm, you can see your top music charts, view thousands of reviews,
biographies and artwork, and get recommendations for local performances you won’t want to miss.
With an affordable subscription you can enjoy an endless choice of personalised ad-free radio stations.
Check out www.last.fm/subscribe today for more details.
Your subscription also gives you access to Last.fm radio on a great range of music products, including
your DENON AV Receiver. This feature is not available in all countries. Visit www.last.fm/hardware
to find out more.
nAbout Napster
Napster is a monthly subscription music distribution service provided by Napster LLC. This service
allows users to download and play pieces of music they want to hear on this unit. Before you can use
Napster, you will need to visit the Napster website on your PC to create an account and register as a
member. For details, access the following site:
http://www.napster.com/choose/index_default.html
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Basic version
BD
41
Playing a network audio
Listening to internet radio
1
Prepare for playback.
q Check the network environment, then turn on this unit’s
power (vpage19 “Connecting to a home network
(LAN)”).
w If settings are required, make the “Network Connecting”
(vpage110).
2
Press NET/USB to switch the
input source to “NET/USB”.
3
Press ui to select “Internet
Radio”, then press ENTER or p.
•Selecting in the “SOURCE SELECT”
menu, lets you directly select “Internet
Radio”.
4
Press ui to select the item you
want to play, then press ENTER
or p.
5
Repeat step 4 until the station list is displayed.
The station list is displayed.
6
Press ui to select the station, then press ENTER or
p.
Playback starts once buffering reaches “100%”.
•There are many Internet radio stations on the Internet, and the
quality of the programs they broadcast as well as the bit rate of the
tracks varies widely.
Generally, the higher the bit rate, the higher the sound quality, but
depending on the communication lines and server traffic, the music
or audio signals being streamed may be interrupted. Inversely, lower
bit rates mean a lower sound quality but less tendency for the sound
to be interrupted.
•“Server Full” or “Connection Down” is displayed if the station is
busy or not broadcasting.
•On this unit, folder and file names can be displayed as titles. Any
characters that cannot be displayed are replaced with “.” (period).
•To play back compressed audio with extended bass or treble
reproduction, we recommend playback in RESTORER mode
(vpage102). The default setting is “Mode3”.
•You can specify the duration of the on-screen display to be displayed
(default: 30 sec) at menu “NET/USB” (vpage116). Press uio
p to return to the original screen.
•When STATUS on the main unit is pressed, the display can be
switched between the title name and radio station name.
nPlaying the last played Internet radio station
Simply press INTERNET RADIO V on the main unit to switch
the input source to “Internet Radio” and play the last played radio
station.
Press INTERNET RADIO V.
The source switches to “Internet Radio” and
the last played radio station plays.
•If INTERNET RADIO V on the main unit is pressed, the same
function as with the remote control unit can be obtained.
•When INTERNET RADIO V is pressed, the AMP-operation mode
starts automatically (vpage120).
nRecently played internet radio stations
Recently played internet radio stations can be selected from
“Recently Played”.
Up to 20 stations stored in “Recently Played”.
1
Press ui to select “Recently
Played”, then press ENTER or p.
2
Press ui to select the item you
want to play, then press ENTER
or p.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Basic version
vSee overleaf
BD
42
Playing a network audio
nSearching stations by keyword
(Alphabetic strings)
1
Press ui to select “Search by Keyword”, then press
ENTER or p.
Station
a
n
0
_
b
o
1
/
c
P
2
:
d
q
3
˜
e
r
4
?
f
s
5
[
g
t
6
\
h
u
7
]
i
v
8
ˆ
j
w
9
`
k
x
.
{
l
y
@
|
m
z
-
}
Search by Keyword
a/A SPACE
INSERT DELETE OK
RETURN
InputSelect Cancel
SEARCH
10Key
SHIFT
a/A
2
Input the characters, then press
OK
.
•For character input, see page87.
nPresetting internet radio stations
Preset Internet radio stations can be selected directly.
1
While the Internet radio station you want to preset is
playing, press MEMORY.
2
Press ui to select “Preset”,
then press ENTER.
Internet Radio
00:14
100%
MEMORY
Memory
Now Playing
CH+/-
Preset
Favorites
Preset
Select
3
Press SHIFT, then press CH +,
CH – or 1 – 8 to select the desired
preset number.
Internet Radio
00:14
100%
MEMORY
Memory
Now Playing
CH+/-
Preset
To store preset:
Select A1-G8
Select
SHIFT CH+/- MEMORY
4
Press MEMORY again to complete the setting.
The Internet radio station is now preset.
nListening to preset internet radio stations
After pressing SHIFT, press CH +,
CH – or 1 – 8 to select the registered
preset number.
This unit automatically connects to the
Internet and playback begins.
Registering Internet radio stations to PRESET
CHANNEL buttons
•Up to three Internet radio stations can be registered to the PRESET
1 – 3
buttons on the remote control unit or main unit.
•Recommended Internet radio stations have already been registered
to the PRESET 1 – 3 buttons.
While the internet radio station you
want to preset is playing, press and
hold PRESET 1 – 3 for at least 3
seconds.
The internet radio station is now preset.
NOTE
If registered at a number that has already been preset, the previously
registered setting is cleared.
Listening to an Internet radio station registered to a
PRESET CHANNEL button
Press one of the registered PRESET
1 – 3
.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Basic version
vSee overleaf
BD
43
Playing a network audio
nRegistering internet radio stations as your
favorites
Favorites are listed at the top of the menu screen, so when a
station is registered as a favorite it can be tuned in easily.
1
Press MEMORY while the Internet radio station you
want to register is playing.
2
Press ui to select “Favorites”,
then press ENTER.
Internet Radio
00:14
100%
MEMORY
Memory
Now Playing
CH+/-
Preset
Favorites
Preset
Select
3
Press o to select “Add”.
The Internet radio station is registered.
Internet Radio
00:14
100%
MEMORY
Memory
Now Playing
CH+/-
Preset
Add Cancel
Is it registered?
Select
•If you do not want to register the station, press p.
nListening to internet radio stations registered in
your favorites
1
Press SOURCE SELECT to display
the “SOURCE SELECT” menu,
then select (vpage 29).
2
Press ui to select the Internet
radio station, then press ENTER
or p.
This unit automatically connects to the
Internet and playback begins.
nClearing internet radio stations from your
favorites
1
Press SOURCE SELECT to display the “SOURCE
SELECT” menu, then select (vpage 29).
2
Press ui to select the Internet
radio station you want to clear,
then press MEMORY.
3
Press o to select “Remove”.
The selected Internet radio station is
cleared.
Favorites
MEMORY
Delete
[1/1]
Radio Algerienne Chaine 1
R
M
CH+/-
Preset
Remove Cancel
Is it deleted?
•To cancel the operation without clearing the station, press p.
nInternet radio operation
Operation buttons Function
INTERNET RADIO V
Last played internet radio station
PRESET 1 – 3 Preset channel (1 – 3) selection
CH +, – Preset channel (A1 – G8) selection
MENU Amp menu
uio p
Cursor operation
ENTER
(Press and release)
Enter
ENTER
(Press and hold)
Stop
SEARCH Page search
z1
/ Character sort
z2
RETURN B
Return
2
Stop
1 – 8 Preset channel selection
SHIFT Preset channel block selection
MEMORY
Favorites / Preset memory
registration
TV Z / X
TV power on/standby
(Default : SONY)
TV INPUT Switch TV input (Default : SONY)
z
1
When the menu screen is displayed, press SEARCH, then press
o (previous page) or p (next page).
To cancel, press ui or SEARCH twice.
z2 When the menu screen is displayed, press SEARCH twice, then
press o p to select the first letter you want to search mode.
•If it is not possible to search the list, “unsorted list...” is
displayed.
To cancel, press ui or SEARCH.
If the list is not in alphabetical order, you may not be able to perform
a character sort.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Basic version
BD
44
Playing a network audio
Playing files stored on a computer
Use this procedure to play music files, image files or playlists.
1
Prepare for playback.
q Check the network environment, then turn on this unit’s
power (vpage19 “Connecting to a home network
(LAN)”).
w If settings are required, make the “Network Connecting”
(vpage110).
e Prepare the computer (vComputer’s operating
instructions).
2
Press SOURCE SELECT to display
the “SOURCE SELECT” menu,
then select (vpage 29).
3
Press ui to select the server
including the le to be played,
then press ENTER or p.
4
Press ui to select the search
item or folder, then press ENTER
or p.
5
Repeat step 4 until the le is displayed.
6
Press ui to select the le, then press ENTER or p.
Playback starts once buffering reaches “100%”.
•Connections to the required system and specific settings must be
made in order to play music files (vpage19).
•Before starting, you must launch the computer’s server software
and set the files as server contents. For details, see the operating
instructions of your server software.
•Depending on the size of the still picture (JPEG) file, some time may
be required for the file to be displayed.
•The order in which the tracks/files are displayed depends on
the server specifications. If the tracks/ files are not displayed in
alphabetical order due to the server specifications, searching by the
first letter may not work properly.
•WMA Lossless files can be played when using a server supporting
transcoding, such as Windows Media Player Ver. 11 or later.
•To play back compressed audio with extended bass or treble
reproduction, we recommend playback in RESTORER mode
(vpage102). The default setting is “Mode3”.
•You can specify the duration of the on-screen display to be displayed
(default: 30 sec) at menu “NET/USB” (vpage116). Press uio
p to return to the original screen.
•Use STATUS on the main unit to switch between displaying the title
name, artist name or album name.
nPlaying files that have been preset or registered
in your favorites
Files can be preset, registered in your favorites and played using
the same operations as for Internet radio stations (vpage43).
NOTE
•Presettings are erased by overwriting them.
•When the operations described below is performed, the media
server’s database is updated and it may no longer be possible to
play preset or favorite music files.
•When you quit the media server and then restart it.
•When music files are deleted or added on the media server.
nMedia server operation
Operation buttons Function
INTERNET RADIO V
Last played internet radio station
PRESET 1 – 3 Preset channel (1 – 3) selection
CH +, – Preset channel (A1 – G8) selection
MENU Amp menu
uio p
Cursor operation /
Auto search (cue, ui)
ENTER
(Press and release)
Enter / Pause
ENTER
(Press and hold)
Stop
SEARCH Page search
z1
/ Character sort
z2
RETURN B
Return
1
Playback / Pause
8 9
Auto search (cue)
3
Pause
2
Stop
1 – 8 Preset channel selection
SHIFT Preset channel block selection
MEMORY
Favorites / Preset memory
registration
TV Z / X
TV power on/standby
(Default : SONY)
TV INPUT Switch TV input (Default : SONY)
•Repeat playback (vpage94 “Repeat”)
•Random playback (vpage94 “Random”)
•Slide show playback (vpage94 “Slide Show”)
z
1
When the menu screen is displayed, press SEARCH, then press
o (previous page) or p (next page).
To cancel, press ui or SEARCH twice.
z2 When the menu screen is displayed, press SEARCH twice, then
press o p to select the first letter you want to search mode.
•If it is not possible to search the list, “unsorted list...” is
displayed.
To cancel, press ui or SEARCH.
If the list is not in alphabetical order, you may not be able to perform
a character sort.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Basic version
BD
45
Playing a network audio
Viewing photographs on the Flickr site
You can view photographs shared by particular users, or all of the
photographs shared on Flickr.
nViewing photographs shared by particular users
1
Prepare for playback.
q Check the network environment, then turn on this unit’s
power (vpage19 “Connecting to a home network
(LAN)”).
w If settings are required, make the “Network Connecting”
(vpage110).
2
Press SOURCE SELECT to display
the “SOURCE SELECT” menu,
then select (vpage 29).
3
Use ui to select “Add Flickr
Contact”, then press ENTER or
p.
Flickr
Add Flickr Contact
All Content
[1/2]
4
Enter “Contact”.
•For character input, see page87.
5
After inputting the “Contact”, then press ENTER.
The “Contact” entered in step 4 is displayed.
•If the Contact you typed in cannot be found, “The Flickr Contact
you entered could not be found” appears. Check and type in the
correct Contact.
6
Press ui to select the folder, and then press ENTER
or p.
Favorites
Displays the favorite photographs of the specified
user.
Photostream
Displays a list of shared photographs.
PhotoSets
Displays the folder (photograph album) list.
Contacts
Displays Contacts registered for Flickr Contact by a
specified user.
Remove this
Contact
Deletes a user from Flickr Contact.
7
Press ui to select the le, and then press ENTER
or p.
The selected file is displayed.
nViewing all photographs on Flickr
1
Prepare for playback.
q Check the network environment, then turn on this unit’s
power (vpage19 “Connecting to a home network
(LAN)”).
w If settings are required, make the “Network Connecting”
(vpage110).
2
Press SOURCE SELECT to display
the “SOURCE SELECT” menu,
then select (vpage 29).
3
Use ui to select “All Content”,
then press ENTER or p.
Flickr
Add Flickr Contact
All Content
[1/2]
4
Press ui to select the folder, and then press ENTER
or p.
Interestingness
Displays photographs that are popular from the
number of user comments or number of times they
are added as favorites.
Recent
Displays the most recently added photographs.
Search by text
Search for photographs by keyword.
5
Press ui to select the le, and then press ENTER
or p.
The selected file is displayed.
NOTE
Depending on the file format, some photographs cannot be viewed.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Basic version
vSee overleaf
BD
46
nFlickr operation
Operation buttons Function
INTERNET RADIO V
Last played internet radio station
PRESET 1 – 3 Preset channel (1 – 3) selection
CH +, – Preset channel (A1 – G8) selection
MENU Amp menu
uio p
Cursor operation /
Auto search (cue, ui)
ENTER
(Press and release)
Enter
ENTER
(Press and hold)
Stop
SEARCH Page Search
z
RETURN B
Return
2
Stop
1 – 8 Preset channel selection
SHIFT Preset channel block selection
TV Z / X
TV power on/standby
(Default : SONY)
TV INPUT Switch TV input (Default : SONY)
•Slide show playback (vpage94 “Slide Show”)
z When the menu screen is displayed, press
SEARCH, then press o
(previous page) or p (next page).
To cancel, press ui or SEARCH.
Playing a network audio
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Basic version
BD
47
Playing a network audio
How to listen to Last.fm on this unit
Last.fm radio is not available in all countries. Please check www.last.
fm/hardware for more information. You’ll also need a subscription. Get
one today at www.last.fm/subscribe.
1
Prepare for playback.
q Check the network environment, then turn on this unit’s
power (vpage19 “Connecting to a home network
(LAN)”).
w If settings are required, make the “Network Connecting”
(vpage110).
2
Press SOURCE SELECT to display the “SOURCE
SELECT” menu, then select (vpage 29).
Last.fm Account
I have a Last.fm account
I am new to Last.fm
Enter
RETURN
Cancel
•If you do not have a Last.fm account, press
i to select “I am new to Last.fm”. Then
press ENTER.
Create an account in accordance with the
instructions on the screen.
3
If you have a Last.fm account, press ui to select “I
have a Last.fm account”. Then press ENTER or p.
Last.fm Account
OK
Enter Username
Username
Password
This service is currently
available in limited countries.
RETURN
Cancel
4
Use ui p to enter your username and password.
•For character input, see page87.
5
After inputting the username and password, select
“OK”, then press ENTER.
If the username and password match, the top menu for Last.
fm is displayed.
•The types of characters that can be input are as shown below.
Username:
GUpper case charactersH
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
GLower case charactersH
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
GSymbolsH - _
GNumbersH 0123456789
Password:
GUpper case charactersH
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
GLower case charactersH
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
GSymbolsH
! “ # $ % & ‘ ( ) z + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^ _ ` { | } ˜
GNumbersH 0123456789 (Space)
6
Use ui to select menu and then press ENTER.
Popular Stations
Play popular artists and tags in your area.
You Recent
Stations
Play your recent stations.
Your stations
You can play tracks from the following
personalised stations (“Your Recommended
Radio”, “Your Library”, “Your Friends’ Radio”,
“Your Top Artists”.
Search Stations
You can search station by Artist or Tag.
7
Use ui to select a station, and press ENTER or 1 to
start playback.
Playback starts and the following screen appears.
Skip Select
Menu
MP3 128kbps
rock Radio
Now Playing
Song
Artist
Album
00:03
100%
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Basic version
vSee overleaf
BD
48
8
Menu items on playback screen.
Love this track
Loving tracks improves your Last.fm
recommendations, and you can optionally share
them on popular social networks.
Ban this track
If you ban a track, we won’t play it again. You can
undo this on the Last.fm website.
Scrobbling
Scrobbling sends the tracks you played to your
Last.fm account. You can see charts of the music
you’ve been listening to, get recommendations for
new music and events in your area and share your
listening tastes with your friends. You can turn this
service on or off using this option. The more you
scrobble, the better your recommendations will
become.
Menu [1/3]
Love this track
Ban this track
Scrobbling(On)
Playing a network audio
NOTE
•The password should be no longer than 99 characters.
•Press RETURN B to cancel the input. When “Cancel input?” is
displayed, select “Yes”, then press
ENTER.
•To play back compressed audio with extended bass or treble
reproduction, we recommend playback in RESTORER mode
(vpage102). The default setting is “Mode3”.
•You can specify the duration of the on-screen display to be displayed
(default: 30 sec) at menu “NET/USB” (vpage116). Press uio
p to return to the original screen.
•Use STATUS on the main unit to switch between displaying the
title name, artist name or album name.
nLast.fm operation
Operation buttons Function
MENU Amp menu
uio p
Cursor operation /
Auto search (cue, i)
ENTER
(Press and release)
Enter
ENTER
(Press and hold)
Stop
SEARCH Page Search
z
RETURN B
Return
1
Playback
9
Auto search (cue)
2
Stop
TV Z / X
TV power on/standby
(Default : SONY)
TV INPUT Switch TV input (Default : SONY)
z When the menu screen is displayed, press
SEARCH, then press o (previous page) or p
(next page).
To cancel, press ui or SEARCH.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Basic version
BD
49
Playing a network audio
Listening to Napster
1
Prepare for playback.
q Check the network environment, then turn on this unit’s
power (vpage19 “Connecting to a home network
(LAN)”).
w If settings are required, make the “Network Connecting”
(vpage110).
2
Press SOURCE SELECT to display
the “SOURCE SELECT” menu,
then select (vpage 29).
3
Use ui p to input “Username”
and “Password”.
Napster Account
OK
Enter Username
Username
Password
RETURN
Cancel
•For character input, see page87.
4
After inputting the “Username” and “Password”,
select “OK”, then press ENTER.
If the “Username” and “Password” match, the top menu for
Napster is displayed.
NOTE
•The password should be no longer than 99 characters.
•Press RETURN B to cancel the input. When “Cancel input?” is
displayed, select “Yes”, then press ENTER.
nSearching from Napster menu
1
Use ui to select search item or
folder, then press ENTER or p.
2
Repeat step 1 until the track is
displayed.
3
Use ui to select the track item, then press ENTER
or p.
nEntering a character sort for the track you want
to listen to
1
Press SEARCH.
My Napster Library
Top 100s
New Releases
Radio
Napster Playlists
Billbord Charts
Staff Picks
[1/7]
Napster
Search by Artist
Search by Album
Search by Track
SEARCH
Search
•You can search by artist name, album name or track name.
2
Use ui to select the search item, then press ENTER.
3
Input the characters, then press
OK
.
Artist Name
RETURN
InputSelect Cancel
SEARCH
10Key
SHIFT
a/A
Search by Artist
a
n
0
_
b
o
1
/
c
P
2
:
d
q
3
˜
e
r
4
?
f
s
5
[
g
t
6
\
h
u
7
]
i
v
8
ˆ
j
w
9
`
k
x
.
{
l
y
@
|
m
z
-
}
a/A SPACE
INSERT DELETE OK
•For character input, see page87.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Basic version
vSee overleaf
BD
50
Playing a network audio
nRegistering tracks in my Napster library
1
Press p while the track you wish
to register is playing.
2
Select “Add to my library”, then
press ENTER or p.
The track is entered in the Library.
Listening to tracks registered in my Napster library
1
Use ui to select “My Napster
Library”, then press ENTER or
p.
2
Use ui to select the information
or track, then press ENTER.
•To play back compressed audio with extended bass or treble
reproduction, we recommend playback in RESTORER mode
(vpage102). The default setting is “Mode3”.
•You can specify the duration of the on-screen display to be displayed
(default: 30 sec) at menu “NET/USB” (vpage116). Press uio
p to return to the original screen.
•Use STATUS on the main unit to switch between displaying the title
name, artist name or album name.
nNapster operation
Operation buttons Function
INTERNET RADIO V
Last played internet radio station
PRESET 1 – 3 Preset channel (1 – 3) selection
CH +, – Preset channel (A1 – G8) selection
MENU Amp menu
uio p
Cursor operation /
Auto search (cue, ui)
ENTER
(Press and release)
Enter
ENTER
(Press and hold)
Stop
SEARCH Search menu / Page search
z
RETURN B
Return
1
Playback
8 9
Auto search (cue)
2
Stop
1 – 8 Preset channel selection
SHIFT Preset channel block selection
TV Z / X
TV power on/standby
(Default : SONY)
TV INPUT Switch TV input (Default : SONY)
•Repeat playback (vpage94 “Repeat”)
•Random playback (vpage94 “Random”)
z When the menu screen is displayed, press
SEARCH twice, then
press o (previous page) or p (next page).
To cancel, press ui or SEARCH.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Basic version
BD
51
Playing a USB memory device
Playing back music or still picture (JPEG) files recorded on a USB memory device.
Important information
nUSB memory devices
A USB memory device can be connected to the USB port of this unit to play music and still picture
(JPEG) files stored on the USB memory device.
Also, files stored on an iPod can be played when the iPod is connected directly to the USB port of this
unit. See “Connect an iPod directly to the USB port to play back” (vpage33).
•Only USB memory devices conforming to mass storage class and MTP (Media Transfer Protocol)
standards can be played on this unit.
•This unit is compatible with USB memory devices in “FAT16” or “FAT32” format.
Album art function
When an MP3 music file includes album art data, the album art can be displayed while playing the file.
Slide show function
Still picture (JPEG) files stored on USB memory devices can be played as slide shows.
The duration each picture is displayed can be set (vpage94).
This unit plays back image (JPEG) files in the orientation in which they are stored in the folder.
n Function that simultaneously plays back music and image files from the network
You can playback music and image files at the same time by playing back music files, and then playing
back image files.
Also, when selecting music files after playing back image files, press SEARCH when the music playback
screen is displayed. Music files and image files can be played back simultaneously. At this time, set
“Slide Show”(vpage94) in the menu to “ON”.
Internet Radio
04:01
100%
MEMORY
Memory
SEARCH
Picture View
Now Playing
MP3 32kbps
CH+/-
Preset
Title
Radio station 
Select
Network contents that can be played back simultaneously are as follows.
•Music files: Favorites, Internet Radio, Media server, USB, iPod Browse Mode (NET/USB)
•Image files: Media server, USB, Flickr
GCompatible formatsH
USB memory devices
z1
WMA (Windows Media Audio)
P
z2
MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3)
P
WAV
P
MPEG-4 AAC
P
z3
FLAC (Free Lossless Audio Codec)
P
JPEG
P
z1 USB
•This unit is compatible with MP3 ID3-Tag (Ver. 2) standard.
•This unit can show the artwork that was embedded by using MP3 ID3-Tag Ver. 2.3 or 2.4.
•This unit is compatible with WMA META tags.
•WAV format Quantization bit rate: 16 bits
•FLAC format Quantization bit rate: 16 or 24 bits
z2 Copyright-protected files can be played on certain portable players compatible with MTP.
z3 Only files that are not protected by copyright can be played on this unit.
Content downloaded from pay sites on the Internet are copyright protected. Also, files encoded in
WMA format when ripped from a CD, etc. on a computer may be copyright protected, depending on
the computer’s settings.
GCompatible formatsH
Sampling frequency Bit rate Extension
WMA (Windows Media Audio) 32/44.1/48 kHz 48 – 192 kbps .wma
MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3) 32/44.1/48 kHz 32 – 320 kbps .mp3
WAV 32/44.1/48 kHz .wav
MPEG-4 AAC 32/44.1/48 kHz 16 – 320 kbps
.aac/
.m4a/
.mp4
FLAC (Free Lossless Audio Codec) 32/44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz .flac
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Basic version
vSee overleaf
BD
52
Playing files stored on USB memory
devices
1
Connect the USB memory device to the USB port
(vpage 15 “Connecting an iPod or USB memory
device to the USB port”).
2
Press NET/USB to switch the
input source to “NET/USB”.
DENON:[AVR-3312]
Favorites
Internet Radio
Flickr
Last.fm
Napster
Media Server
USB
[1/7]
CH +/-
Preset
3
Use ui to select “USB”, then
press ENTER or p.
USB
D&M1
D&M2
Music2.mp3
Music3.m4a
Music4.m4a
D&M3
Music1.mp4
[1/9]
SEARCH
P/Search
CH +/-
Preset
•Selecting in the “SOURCE SELECT” menu, lets you directly
select “USB/iPod”.
4
Press ui to select the search item or folder, then
press ENTER or p.
5
Press ui to select the le, then press ENTER, p or
1.
Playback starts.
Playing a USB memory device
•You can specify the duration of the on-screen display to be displayed
(default: 30 sec) at menu “NET/USB” (vpage116). Press uio
p to return to the original screen.
•To play back compressed audio with extended bass or treble
reproduction, we recommend playback in RESTORER mode
(vpage102). The default setting is “Mode3”.
•If the USB memory device is divided into multiple partitions, only the
top partition can be selected.
•This unit is compatible with MP3 files conforming to “MPEG-1 Audio
Layer-3” standards.
NOTE
•Note that DENON will accept no responsibility whatsoever for any
problems arising with the data on a USB memory device when using
this unit in conjunction with the USB memory device.
•USB memory devices will not work via a USB hub.
•DENON does not guarantee that all USB memory devices will
operate or be supplied power. When using a USB portable hard disk
that can draw power from an AC adapter, we recommend using the
AC adapter.
•It is not possible to connect and use a computer via the USB port of
this unit using a USB cable.
nUSB operation
Operation buttons Function
INTERNET RADIO V
Last played internet radio station
PRESET 1 – 3 Preset channel (1 – 3) selection
CH +, – Preset channel (A1 – G8) selection
MENU Amp menu
uio p
Cursor operation /
Auto search (cue, ui)
ENTER
(Press and release)
Enter / Pause
ENTER
(Press and hold)
Stop
SEARCH Page search
z1
/ Character sort
z2
RETURN B
Return
1
Playback / Pause
8 9
Auto search (cue)
3
Pause
2
Stop
1 – 8 Preset channel selection
SHIFT Preset channel block selection
TV Z / X
TV power on/standby (Default :
SONY)
TV INPUT Switch TV input (Default : SONY)
•Repeat playback (vpage94 “Repeat”)
•Random playback (vpage94 “Random”)
•Slide show playback (vpage94 “Slide Show”)
z1 When the menu screen is displayed, press
SEARCH, then press
o (previous page) or p (next page).
To cancel, press ui or SEARCH twice.
z2 When the menu screen is displayed, press SEARCH twice, then
press o p to select the first letter you want to search mode.
•If it is not possible to search the list, “unsorted list...” is
displayed.
To cancel, press ui or SEARCH.
If the list is not in alphabetical order, you may not be able to perform
a character sort.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Basic version
BD
53
Selecting a listening mode (SURROUND MODE)
This unit can play input audio signals in multi-channel surround mode
or in stereo mode.
Select a listening mode suitable for the playback contents (cinema,
music, etc.) or according to your liking.
Selecting a listening mode
1
Play the selected device
(vpage 30 51).
2
Press MOVIE, MUSIC, GAME or
DIRECT to select a listening mode.
•Each time MOVIE, MUSIC or GAME is
pressed, the listening mode is switched.
Switches to the listening mode
suitable for enjoying movies and TV
programs.
Switches to the listening mode
suitable for enjoying music.
Switches to the listening mode suitable for enjoying games.
Switches the listening mode to Direct or Pure Direct mode.
In Direct mode, the audio is played back exactly how it was
recorded.
•Pressing
MOVIE, MUSIC or GAME displays a list of the surround
modes that can be selected on the TV screen. While the list is
displayed, you can also use ui to select a surround mode.
GExampleH When MOVIE is pressed
STEREO
DOLBY PLII CINEMA
DOLBY PRO LOGIC
DTS NEO:6 CINEMA
MULTI CH STEREO
MONO MOVIE
MOVIE SURROUND
nListening mode
•The following listening modes can be selected using the MOVIE, MUSIC, GAME, and DIRECT buttons.
•Adjust the sound field effect with the menu “Surround Parameters” (vpage97) to enjoy your favorite sound mode.
Operation
button
Input signal Listening mode
2-channel
z1
STEREO
DOLBY PLgx Cinema
z2
DOLBY PLg Cinema
z2
/
DOLBY PLg Cinema A-DSX
z4
DOLBY Pro Logic
z2
/
DOLBY Pro Logic A-DSX
z4
DTS NEO:6 Cinema
z2
/
DTS NEO:6 Cinema A-DSX
z4
DOLBY PLgz Height
z2
MULTI CH STEREO
MONO MOVIE
VIRTUAL
Multi-channel
z3
STEREO
Dolby Digital
DOLBY DIGITAL /
DOLBY DIGITAL A-DSX
z4
DOLBY DIGITAL EX
DOLBY DIGITAL + PLgx Cinema
DOLBY DIGITAL + PLgz
Dolby TrueHD
DOLBY TrueHD /
DOLBY TrueHD A-DSX
z4
DOLBY TrueHD + EX
DOLBY TrueHD + PLgx Cinema
DOLBY TrueHD + PLgz
Dolby Digital
Plus
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus /
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus A-DSX
z4
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus + EX
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus + PLgx Cinema
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus
+ PLgz
DTS
DTS SURROUND /
DTS SURROUND A-DSX
z4
DTS ES DSCRT 6.1
DTS ES MTRX 6.1
DTS 96/24
DTS 96 ES MTRX
DTS ES DSCRT
DTS + NEO:6
DTS + PLgx Cinema
DTS + PLgz
Operation
button
Input signal Listening mode
DTS-HD /
DTS Express
DTS-HD HI RES /
DTS-HD HI RES A-DSX
z4
DTS-HD MSTR /
DTS-HD MSTR A-DSX
z4
DTS Express / DTS Express A-DSX
z4
DTS-HD + NEO:6
DTS-HD + PLgx Cinema
DTS-HD + PLgz
PCM multi-
channel
MULTI CH IN /
MULTI CH IN A-DSX
z4
MULTI CH IN 7.1
MULTI IN + Dolby EX
MULTI IN + PLgx Cinema
MULTI IN + PLgz
Multi-channel
z3
MULTI CH STEREO
MONO MOVIE
VIRTUAL
z1 2-channel also includes analog input.
z2 This mode plays back 2-channel source in 5.1 or 7.1-channel
playback. It cannot be selected when headphones are used, or
when only front speakers are used.
z3 Some listening modes cannot be selected, depending on the
audio format or number of channels of the input signal. For
details, see “Types of input signals, and corresponding surround
modes” (vpage136).
z4 These modes add a new channel to the 5.1 channel surround
using Audyssey DSX™ processing (vpage101).
When “Height” is selected, a front height channel is added.
When “Wide” is selected, a front wide channel is added for
playback.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Basic version
vSee overleaf
54
Selecting a listening mode
Operation
button
Input signal Listening mode
DTS-HD /
DTS Express
DTS-HD HI RES /
DTS-HD HI RES A-DSX
z4
DTS-HD MSTR /
DTS-HD MSTR A-DSX
z4
DTS Express / DTS Express A-DSX
z4
DTS-HD + NEO:6
DTS-HD + PLgx Music
DTS-HD + PLgz
PCM multi-
channel
MULTI CH IN /
MULTI CH IN A-DSX
z4
MULTI CH IN 7.1
MULTI IN + Dolby EX
MULTI IN + PLgx Music
MULTI IN + PLgz
Multi-channel
z3
MULTI CH STEREO
ROCK ARENA
JAZZ CLUB
MATRIX
VIRTUAL
Operation
button
Input signal Listening mode
2-channel
z1
STEREO
DOLBY PLgx Music
z2
DOLBY PLg Music
z2
/
DOLBY PLg Music A-DSX
z4
DTS NEO:6 Music
z2
/
DTS NEO:6 Music A-DSX
z4
DOLBY PLgz Height
z2
MULTI CH STEREO
ROCK ARENA
JAZZ CLUB
MATRIX
VIRTUAL
Multi-channel
z3
STEREO
Dolby Digital
DOLBY DIGITAL /
DOLBY DIGITAL A-DSX
z4
DOLBY DIGITAL EX
DOLBY DIGITAL + PLgx Music
DOLBY DIGITAL + PLgz
Dolby TrueHD
DOLBY TrueHD /
DOLBY TrueHD A-DSX
z4
DOLBY TrueHD + EX
DOLBY TrueHD + PLgx Music
DOLBY TrueHD + PLgz
Dolby Digital
Plus
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus /
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus A-DSX
z4
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus + EX
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus + PLgx Music
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus
+ PLgz
DTS
DTS SURROUND /
DTS SURROUND A-DSX
z4
DTS ES DSCRT 6.1
DTS ES MTRX 6.1
DTS 96/24
DTS 96 ES MTRX
DTS ES DSCRT
DTS + NEO:6
DTS + PLgx Music
DTS + PLgz
z1 2-channel also includes analog input.
z2 This mode plays back 2-channel source in 5.1 or 7.1-channel
playback. It cannot be selected when headphones are used, or
when only front speakers are used.
z3 Some listening modes cannot be selected, depending on the
audio format or number of channels of the input signal. For
details, see “Types of input signals, and corresponding surround
modes” (vpage136).
z4 These modes add a new channel to the 5.1 channel surround
using Audyssey DSX™ processing (vpage101).
When “Height” is selected, a front height channel is added.
When “Wide” is selected, a front wide channel is added for
playback.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Basic version
vSee overleaf
55
Selecting a listening mode
Operation
button
Input signal Listening mode
All
DIRECT
PURE DIRECT
z1 2-channel also includes analog input.
z2 This mode plays back 2-channel source in 5.1 or 7.1-channel
playback. It cannot be selected when headphones are used, or
when only front speakers are used.
z3 Some listening modes cannot be selected, depending on the
audio format or number of channels of the input signal. For
details, see “Types of input signals, and corresponding surround
modes” (vpage136).
z4 These modes add a new channel to the 5.1 channel surround
using Audyssey DSX™ processing (vpage101).
When “Height” is selected, a front height channel is added.
When “Wide” is selected, a front wide channel is added for
playback.
Operation
button
Input signal Listening mode
2-channel
z1
STEREO
DOLBY PLgx Game
z2
DOLBY PLg Game
z2
/
DOLBY PLg Game A-DSX
z4
DOLBY PLgz Height
z2
MULTI CH STEREO
VIDEO GAME
VIRTUAL
Multi-channel
z3
STEREO
Dolby Digital
DOLBY DIGITAL /
DOLBY DIGITAL A-DSX
z4
DOLBY DIGITAL EX
DOLBY DIGITAL + PLgz
Dolby TrueHD
DOLBY TrueHD /
DOLBY TrueHD A-DSX
z4
DOLBY TrueHD + EX
DOLBY TrueHD + PLgz
Dolby Digital
Plus
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus /
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus A-DSX
z4
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus + EX
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus
+ PLgz
DTS
DTS SURROUND /
DTS SURROUND A-DSX
z4
DTS ES DSCRT 6.1
DTS ES MTRX 6.1
DTS 96/24
DTS 96 ES MTRX
DTS ES DSCRT
DTS + NEO:6
DTS + PLgz
DTS-HD /
DTS Express
DTS-HD HI RES /
DTS-HD HI RES A-DSX
z4
DTS-HD MSTR /
DTS-HD MSTR A-DSX
z4
DTS Express
/ DTS Express A-DSX
z4
DTS-HD + NEO:6
DTS-HD + PLgz
PCM multi-
channel
MULTI CH IN /
MULTI CH IN A-DSX
z4
MULTI CH IN 7.1
MULTI IN + Dolby EX
MULTI IN + PLgz
Multi-channel
z3
MULTI CH STEREO
VIDEO GAME
VIRTUAL
Views on the TV screen or display
q w
q Shows a decoder to be used.
•A DOLBY DIGITAL Plus decoder is displayed as “DOLBY D +”.
w Shows a decoder that creates sound output from the surround
back speakers.
•“+ PLgz” indicates the front height sound from front height
speakers.
q w
q Shows a decoder to be used.
w Shows a Audyssey DSX™ processing.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Basic version
vSee overleaf
56
Selecting a listening mode
nDescription of listening mode types
Dolby listening mode
Listening mode type Description
DOLBY PLgx
z1
This mode can be selected when a Dolby Pro Logic gx decoder is used to
play back 2-channel source in 6.1/7.1-channel surround sound including the
surround back channel.
By adding the surround back channel, a stronger surround feeling is obtained
compared to Dolby Pro Logic g.
There are three playback modes: “Cinema” mode that is optimized for movie
playback, “Music” mode that is optimized for music playback, and “Game”
mode that is optimized for game play.
DOLBY PLg This mode can be selected when a Dolby Pro Logic g decoder is used to play
back 2-channel source in 5.1-channel surround sound with a natural, realistic
feel.
DOLBY Pro Logic This mode can be selected when a DOLBY Pro Logic decoder is used to play
2-channel source in 4.1-channel surround sound (Left/Center/Right/Surround
Mono).
DOLBY PLgz
z2
This mode can be selected when a Dolby Pro Logic gz decoder is used to play
back 2-channel source in 7.1-channel surround sound with added front height
channel.
By adding a front height channel, the vertical expression is emphasized,
improving the three-dimensionality of the sound.
DOLBY DIGITAL This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded with Dolby Digital.
DOLBY DIGITAL EX
z1
This mode improves the depth, dimension, and expressiveness of the sound
stage by sound field playback including surround back channels.
DOLBY TrueHD This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in Dolby TrueHD.
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded with Dolby Digital
Plus.
z1 This can be selected when “Speaker Config.” – “Surr.Back” is not set to “None”.
z2 This can be selected when “Speaker Config.” – “Front Height” is not set to “None”.
DTS listening mode
Listening mode type Description
DTS NEO:6 This mode can be selected when a DTS NEO:6 decoder is used to play back
2-channel source in 6.1/7.1-channel surround sound including the surround
back channel.
There is a “Cinema” mode optimized for movie playback, and a “Music” mode
optimized for music playback.
DTS SURROUND This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in DTS.
DTS ES DSCRT6.1
z
This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in DTS-ES.
Provides optimum playback of DTS-ES Discrete signals using surround back.
DTS ES MTRX6.1
z
This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in DTS-ES.
Surround back channel data encoded in DTS-ES Matrix recording software is
played from the surround back channel.
DTS 96/24 This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in DTS 96/24.
DTS-HD This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in DTS-HD.
DTS Express This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in DTS Express.
z This can be selected when “Speaker Config.” – “Surr.Back” is not set to “None”.
PCM multi-channel listening mode
Listening mode type Description
MULTI CH IN This mode can be selected when playing multi-channel PCM sources .
Audyssey DSX listening mode
Listening mode type Description
Audyssey DSX (A-DSX)
z
This mode creates playback for the new channels (front wide or front height) in
5.1-channel systems. By adding front wide or front high channels, the surround
sound effects sound more three dimensional and realistic.
z This can be selected when a setting other than “None” is selected for “Front Height” or “Front Wide”,
and a setting other than “None” is selected for “Center” in “Speaker Config.” (vpage105).
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Basic version
vSee overleaf
57
Selecting a listening mode
DENON original listening mode
Listening mode type Description
MULTI CH STEREO This mode is for enjoying stereo sound from all speakers.
The same sound as that from the front speakers (L/R) is played back at the
same level from the surround speakers (L/R) and surround back speakers (L/R).
ROCK ARENA This mode is for enjoying the atmosphere of a live concert in an arena.
JAZZ CLUB This mode is for enjoying the atmosphere of a live concert in a jazz club.
MONO MOVIE This mode is for playing monaural movie sources with surround sound.
When playing sources recorded in monaural in the “MONO MOVIE” mode,
the sound will be off balance with a single channel (left or right), so input to
both channels.
VIDEO GAME This mode is suited for achieving surround sound with video games.
MATRIX This mode lets you add a spacious feel to stereo music sources.
VIRTUAL This mode is for enjoying surround effects using only the front speakers or
headphones.
STEREO listening mode
Listening mode type Description
STEREO This is the mode for playing in stereo. The tone can be adjusted.
•Sound is output from the front left and right speakers and subwoofer.
•If multichannel signals are input, they are mixed down to 2-channel audio and
are played.
Direct listening mode
Listening mode type Description
DIRECT Sound recorded in source is played as is.
•Surround back signals or front height signals are not created.
PURE DIRECT This mode is for playback in higher sound quality than in “Direct playback”
mode.
Turn the display of the amplifier off to stop the analogue video circuit. This
suppresses the source of noise that affects sound quality.
•Surround back signals or front height signals are not created.
In Direct listening mode, the following items cannot be adjusted.
•Tone (vpage99) •MultEQ
®
XT (vpage100) •Dynamic EQ
®
(vpage100)
•Dynamic Volume
®
(
vpage100
)
•RESTORER (vpage102)
NOTE
•Video signals are only output when HDMI signals are played in the PURE DIRECT mode.
•When in the PURE DIRECT mode, the menu screen is not displayed.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Basic version
Advanced
version
58
F Speaker installation/connection (Advanced connection) vpage59
F Playback (Advanced operation) vpage70
F Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3 (Separate room) vpage81
F How to make detailed settings vpage84
F Operating the connected devices by remote control unit vpage120
Advanced version
Here, we explain functions and operations that let you make better use of this unit.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
59
This section provides the installation, connection,
and setup methods of speaker systems other than
the 7.1-channel system with surround back speakers.
For the speaker installation, connection, and setup
methods of the 7.1-channel system with surround
back speakers, see
C page 4 “SETUP WIZARD”.
Use Audyssey
®
Auto Setup function of this unit
to automatically detect the number of connected
speakers and perform optimal settings for the
speakers to be used.
Procedure for speaker settings
Install
Connect (vpage61)
Set up speakers (vpage67)
Install
This unit is compatible with Audyssey DSX™ (vpage 141)
and Dolby Pro Logic gz (vpage 142), which offers an even
wider and deeper surround sensation.
When using Audyssey DSX™, install front wide speakers or front
height speakers.
When using Dolby Pro Logic gz, install front height speakers.
Install the surround back speakers in a position 60 to 90 cm higher
than ear level.
z1
z2
45˚
Surround
speaker
60 – 90 cm
GViewed from the sideH
Front height
speaker
•Point slightly
downwards
At least
1 m
Surround back
speaker
•Point slightly
downwards
Front
speaker
Front wide
speaker
z1 Recommended for Dolby Pro Logic gz
z2 Recommended for Audussey DSX™
NOTE
Sound is not output simultaneously from the surround back speakers,
front height speakers, and front wide speakers. You can switch
between speakers by changing the settings in surround mode or
Audyssey DSX™.
When 7.1ch (Surround back / Front height / Front
wide speaker) installed
FHRFHL
FL
FR
SL
SR
FWL
FWR
SW
1
SW
2
C
SBL SBR
z1
z2
z3
z5
z4
Listening
position
z1 22˚ – 30˚ z2 22˚ – 45˚ z3 55˚ – 60˚
z4 90˚ – 110˚ z5 135˚ – 150˚
GSpeaker abbreviationsH
FL Front speaker (L) SBL Surround back speaker (L)
FR Front speaker (R) SBR Surround back speaker (R)
C Center speaker FHL Front height speaker (L)
SW Subwoofer FHR Front height speaker (R)
SL Surround speaker (L) FWL Front wide speaker (L)
SR Surround speaker (R) FWR Front wide speaker (R)
Speaker installation/connection (Advanced connection)
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
vSee overleaf
60
Install
When 6.1ch (Surround back speaker) installed
FL FR
C
SB
SL
SR
SW
z1
z2
Listening position
z1 22˚ – 30˚ z2 90˚ – 110˚
GSpeaker abbreviationsH
FL Front speaker (L) SL Surround speaker (L)
FR Front speaker (R) SR Surround speaker (R)
C Center speaker SB Surround back speaker
SW Subwoofer
When 5.1ch installed
FL FR
SW
C
SL
SR
z1
z2
Listening
position
z1 22˚ – 30˚ z2 120˚
When Front A/B speakers installed
FR(A) FR(B)
SW
FL(B) FL(A)
Listening position
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
61
Connect
•For the method of connecting 7.1-channel system with surround back speakers, see
C page 6 “Connecting the speakers”.
•For the method of connecting the TV, see C page 3 “Connect this unit to the
television using an HDMI cable (sold separately)”.
7.1-channel (Surround back / Front height / Front wide speaker)
connection
The illustration on the right shows a connection example for performing 7.1-channel
playback using the surround back, front height or front wide speakers.
If you connect the surround back, front height and front wide speakers before you
start playback, the audio is played back by automatically switching the speakers in
accordance with the surround mode or input signals.
To perform 7.1-channel playback using the surround back, front height or front wide
speakers, set “Amp Assign” to “NORMAL” in steps 3 and 4 for “Set up “Amp
Assign”” (vpage67).
NOTE
•For speaker cable connections, see C page 6 “Connecting the speakers”.
•Connect so that the speaker cable core wires do not protrude from the speaker
terminal. The protection circuit may be activated if the core wires touch the
rear panel or if the + and – sides touch each other (vpage143 “Protection
Circuit”).
•Never touch the speaker terminals while the power supply is connected.
Doing so could result in electric shock (When the Setup wizard is running,
follow the instructions in the Setup wizard screen for making connections.).
•Use speakers with the speaker impedances shown below.
Speaker terminals Speaker impedance
FRONT
6 – 16 Ω
CENTER
SURROUND
SURR. BACK / AMP ASSIGN
F.HEIGHT
F.WIDE
FL FR
C
SBL SBR
SL
SR
SW
FWR
FWL
FHRFHL
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
62
Connect
6.1-channel (Surround back speaker) connection
If using only one surround back speaker (with a 6.1-channel connection), connect to the “L” side of the
SURR. BACK/AMP ASSIGN terminal.
For speaker settings in this case, see “When 6.1ch (Surround back speaker) installed” (vpage60).
To perform 6.1-channel playback using the surround back speaker, set “Amp Assign” to “NORMAL” in
steps 3 and 4 for “Set up “Amp Assign”” (vpage67).
Also use the “Speaker Config.” setting (vpage105) to set “Surr.Back” to “1spkr”.
NOTE
•For speaker cable connections, see C page 6 “Connecting the speakers”.
•For speaker impedance , see page61.
FL FR
C
SB
SL
SR
SW
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
63
Connect
5.1-channel connection
To perform 5.1-channel playback, set “Amp Assign” to “NORMAL” in steps 3 and 4 for “Set up “Amp
Assign”” (vpage67).
NOTE
•For speaker cable connections, see C page 6 “Connecting the speakers”.
•For speaker impedance , see page61.
FL FR
C
SL
SR
SW
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
64
2.1-channel connection
FL FR
SW
NOTE
•For speaker cable connections, see C page 6 “Connecting the speakers”.
•For speaker impedance , see page61.
nFor connecting two subwoofers
Two subwoofers can be connected to this unit.
The same signal is output from each subwoofer terminal.
Front A/B connection
You can connect a second set of speakers to this unit and use them for playback.
In this case, set “Amp Assign” to “Front B” in steps 3 and 4 for “Set up “Amp Assign”” (vpage67).
FL(A)FL(B) FR(B)FR(A)
SW
For surround playback of a multichannel source, if you connect the center speaker, surround speakers and
subwoofers, 5.1-channel playback is available.
Front speakers can be used separately, depending on the speaker’s specifications or playback source such
as front speakers (A) for multichannel playback and front speakers (B) for 2-channel playback (vpage107
“Front Speaker Setup”).
NOTE
•For speaker cable connections, see C page 6 “Connecting the speakers”.
•For speaker impedance , see page61.
Connect
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
65
Connect
Bi-Amp connection
You can use the front speakers via the bi-amp connection.
A bi-amp connection is to connect separate amplifiers to the tweeter terminals and woofer terminals of
speakers compatible with the bi-amp function. This prevents the back electromotive force (returned force
without output) of the woofer sent to the tweeter, which affects the sound quality of the tweeter, and you
can enjoy playback with higher-quality sound.
In this case, set “Amp Assign” to “Bi-AMP” in steps 3 and 4 for “Set up “Amp Assign”” (vpage67).
For surround playback of a multichannel source, if you connect the center speaker, surround speakers and
subwoofers, 5.1-channel playback is available.
NOTE
•For speaker cable connections, see C page 6 “Connecting the speakers”.
•For speaker impedance , see page61.
•Use speakers compatible with bi-amp connections.
•When making bi-amp connections, be sure to remove the short-circuiting plate or wire between the
speaker’s woofer and tweeter terminals.
FL FR
SW
wq wq
(R) (L)
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
66
Connect
FLFL’ FR FR’
C
SW
SL
SR
Multi channel playback
(Surround mode)
2-channel playback
(Direct/Stereo mode)
Switching
5.1-channel + 2-channel connection
You can connect the other front speakers for 2-channel playback using
the DIRECT mode or STEREO mode.
The speakers used exclusively for 5.1-channel playback and the
speakers used exclusively for 2-channel playback are automatically
switched for playback in accordance with the surround mode.
To set the speakers for automatic switching during playback, select
“Amp Assign” and set to “2CH” using steps 3 and 4 of “Set up “Amp
Assign”” (vpage67).
NOTE
•For speaker cable connections, see C page 6 “Connecting the
speakers”.
•For speaker impedance , see page61.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
67
1
Set up the
remote control unit
n Set up the zone mode
Press ZONE SELECT to switch the zone mode to
J (MAIN ZONE).
The J indicator lights.
Press ZONE SELECT
n Set up the operation mode
Press AMP to set the remote control unit to AMP-
operation mode.
Press AMP
2
Connect the setup microphone.
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP
1 2 3 4 5 6
Amp Assign
RETURN
Auto Setup Start
Channel Select
STEP1 Preparation
Connect the speakers and place them according
to the recommendations in the manual,
Set the following items
If necessary.
Start Auto Setup
Enter Cancel
When the setup microphone is
connected, the following screen is
displayed.
Set up speakers
around items indicate the settings.
This section provides the setup methods of speaker systems other than the 7.1-channel system with surround back speakers.
For the setup methods of the 7.1-channel system with surround back speakers, see C page 4 “SETUP WIZARD”.
First install and connect the speakers to this unit.
Before Auto Setup measurement, the settings shown below can be made.
•Changing the amplifier assignment (Amp Assign)
The signal output from the SURR.BACK/AMP ASSIGN speaker terminal of this unit can be switched to match your speaker environment (vpage67 “Set up “Amp Assign””).
•Setting the channels to be used (Channel Select)
If channels that are not to be used are set in advance, measurement for the set channels is skipped, and measuring time can be reduced. You can also change the number of surround back speakers (vpage68
“Set up “Channel Select””).
3
Set up “Amp Assign”
Use ui to select “Amp Assign”, and then press
ENTER.
AMP ASSIGN [1/2]
RETURN
Assign Mode NORMAL
5.1 ch/7.1 ch
Return
ZONE2: ZONE3:
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP
1 2 3 4 5 6
Amp Assign
RETURN
Auto Setup Start
Channel Select
STEP1 Preparation
Connect the speakers and place them according
to the recommendations in the manual,
Set the following items
If necessary.
Change assigned power amp to match the speaker system
Enter Cancel
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
vSee overleaf
68
Set up speakers
6
Set up “Channel Select”
Use ui to select “Channel Select”, and then press
ENTER.
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP
1 2 3 4 5 6
Amp Assign
RETURN
Auto Setup Start
Channel Select
STEP1 Preparation
Connect the speakers and place them according
to the recommendations in the manual,
Set the following items
If necessary.
Enable skip of measuring unused channels to reduce time
Enter Cancel
Subwoofer
Surround Back
Front Height
Front Wide
Measure
Measure (2spkrs)
Measure
Measure
RETURN
Enter
Cancel
Measure subwoofer channel
Channel Select
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP
1 2 3 4 5 6
Amp Assign
RETURN
Auto Setup Start
Channel Select
STEP1 Preparation
Connect the speakers and place them according
to the recommendations in the manual,
Set the following items
If necessary.
Enable skip of measuring unused channels to reduce time
Enter Cancel
7
Use ui to select a channel.
Front
Select for setting the front speakers to be used. In this
case, go to step 8.
•“Front” can be set when “Amp Assign” is set to
“Front B”.
Subwoofer
Select for no subwoofers to be used. In this case, go
to step 9.
Surround
Back
Select the number of surround back speakers to be
used. In this case, go to step 10.
•“Surround Back” can be set when “Amp Assign” is
set to “NORMAL”.
Front
Height
Select for no front height speakers to be used. In this
case, go to step 11.
•“Front Height” can be set when “Amp Assign” is set
to “NORMAL”.
Front Wide
Select for no front wide speakers to be used. In this
case, go to step 12.
•“Front Wide” can be set when “Amp Assign” is set
to “NORMAL”.
8
Press o p to select a front speaker.
A
Select this to use front speaker A.
B
Select this to use front speaker B.
A+B
Select this to use front speakers A and B simultaneously.
4
Use o p to select the
conguration of the connected
speakers.
NORMAL
Select the “NORMAL” setting to perform 7.1-channel
playback using the surround back, front height, or
front wide speakers.
ZONE2
Select the “ZONE2” setting to assign the unit’s built-
in power amplifier for ZONE2 and output the audio
in stereo.
ZONE3
Select the “ZONE3” setting to assign the unit’s built-
in power amplifier for ZONE3 and output the audio
in stereo.
Z2/Z3(M)
Select the “Z2/Z3(M)” setting to assign the unit’s
built-in power amplifier for ZONE2 and ZONE3 and
output the audio in monaural.
Bi-AMP
Select the “Bi-AMP” setting to connect the front
speakers via the bi-amp connection.
2CH
When you perform 2-channel playback in the DIRECT
or STEREO mode, select the “2CH” setting to use
the other front speakers for playback.
Front B
Select the “Front B” setting to use the second set of
front speakers for playback.
5
Press RETURN B to exit the “Amp Assign” setting.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
vSee overleaf
69
Set up speakers
9
Use o p to set whether or not a
subwoofer channel is measured.
Measure Set for measuring a subwoofer.
Skip
Set for no measuring of a
subwoofer.
10
Use o p to set whether or not a surround back
channel is measured.
Measure
(2 spkrs)
Set for measuring two surround back speakers.
Measure
(1 spkr)
Set for measuring a surround back speaker.
Skip
Set for no measuring of a surround back speaker.
11
Use o p to set whether or not a front height channel
is measured.
Measure Set to measure the front height speakers.
Skip
Set when you do not want to measure the front height
speakers.
12
Use o p to set whether or not a front wide channel
is measured.
Measure
Set to measure the front wide speakers.
Skip
Set when you do not want to measure the front wide
speakers.
13
Press RETURN B.
Proceed to page23
STEP1 Preparation
step 6.
NOTE
After performing Audyssey
®
Auto Setup, do not change the speaker
connections or subwoofer volume. In event of a change, perform
Audyssey
®
Auto Setup again.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
70
n HDMI control function (vpage70)
n Sleep timer function (vpage71)
n Adjusting the volume of the speakers
(vpage72)
n Quick select function (vpage73)
n REC OUT mode (vpage74)
n AirPlay (vpage75)
n Party mode function (vpage76)
n Zone Management function (vpage77)
n Operating a media controller to play music and still
pictures (vpage78)
n Web control function (vpage79)
n Various memory functions (vpage80)
Playback (Basic operation) (vpage28)
Settings (vpage21)
Selecting a listening mode (SURROUND MODE)
(vpage53)
Playback (Advanced operation)
Convenient functions
HDMI control function
If you connect the unit and an HDMI control function compatible TV or
player with an HDMI cable and then enable the HDMI control function
setting on each device, the devices will be able to control each other.
nOperations possible by HDMI control
•This unit power off can be linked to the TV power off step.
•You can switch audio output devices with a TV operation.
When you set “Output audio from amp” in the TV audio output
setup operation, you can switch the amp power on.
•You can adjust this unit volume in the TV volume adjustment
operation.
•You can switch this unit input sources through linkage to TV
input switching.
•When playing the player, this unit input source switches to the
source for that player.
•If you switch the input source of the unit to “TV”, you can
play TV audio with this unit (vpage7 “About ARC (Audio
Return Channel) function”).
•When “HDMI Control” – “Control” (vpage108) in the menu
is set to “ON”, signals input to the HDMI input connector are
output to the television or other device connected to the HDMI
output connector, even if the power of this unit is in standby
(pass-through function).
•To play the audio of a TV that does not support the ARC function
with the unit, connect the TV with an optical digital connection.
•To use the pass-through function, connect an HDMI connection
device that is compatible with HDMI control.
nSetting procedure
1
Set the HDMI output connector corresponding with
the HDMI control function.
Set “HDMI Control” – “Control” (vpage108) to “ON“.
2
Turn the power on for all the devices connected by
HDMI cable.
3
Set the HDMI control function for all devices
connected by HDMI cable.
•Please consult the operating instructions for the connected devices
to check the settings.
•Carry out steps 2 and 3 should any of the devices be unplugged.
4
Switch the television input to the HDMI input
connected to this unit.
5
Switch this unit input to the HDMI input source and
check if the picture from the player is ok.
6
When you turn the TV’s power to standby, check
that the power of this unit also goes to standby.
If the HDMI control function does not operate properly, check the
following points.
•Is the TV or player compatible with the HDMI control function?
•Is “HDMI Control” – “Control” (vpage108) set to “ON”?
•Is “Power Off Control” (vpage108) set to “All” or “Video”?
•Is “Control Monitor” (vpage 108) set for the monitor output
connected to television?
•In the case of dual monitor connection, is “Control Monitor”
(vpage108) on the menu set to a monitor without HDMI control?
•Are the HDMI control function settings of all devices correct?
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
vSee overleaf
BD
71
Convenient functions
NOTE
•When “HDMI Control” – “Control” is set to “ON”, it consumes
more standby power.
•The HDMI control function controls operations of a TV that is
compatible with the HDMI control function. Make sure that the TV
and HDMI are connected when you perform HDMI control.
•Some functions may not operate depending on the connected TV
or player. Check the owner’s manual of each device for details
beforehand.
•When “Power Off Control” on the menu is set to “OFF”
(vpage108), this unit is not set to standby even if the connected
device is in the standby mode.
•When connection changes are implemented, such as adding
connections to HDMI devices, linked operations may be initialized.
In this case, you will need to reconfigure the settings.
•When “HDMI Control” – “Control” is set to “ON”, it is not
possible to assign an HDMI connector to “TV” at “Input Assign”
(vpage90).
•Should any of the operations below be performed, the interlocking
function may be reset, in which case, repeat steps 2 and 3.
•“Input Assign” – “HDMI” (vpage90) setting has changed.
•“Monitor Out” (vpage107) setting is changed.
•There is a change to the connection between the devices and the
HDMI, or an increase in devices.
Sleep timer function
The power automatically goes into standby once the set time has
elapsed.
This is convenient for playing sources while going to sleep.
Press SLEEP and display the time you
want to set.
The indicator on the display lights.
•The time switches as shown below each
time SLEEP is pressed.
OFF 10 min 20 30 40 50
6080 7090100
110
120
To confirm the countdown time before putting the
unit to sleep
Press SLEEP.
“Sleep : zmin” appears on the display.
z Countdown time
To cancel the sleep timer
Press SLEEP to set “OFF”.
The indicator on the display turns off.
•The sleep timer setting is canceled if this unit’s power is set to
standby.
•The sleep timer function can be set separately for the different zones
(vpage83 “Sleep timer function”).
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
BD
72
Convenient functions
Adjusting the volume of the speakers
You can adjust the channel level either according to the playback
sources or to suit your taste, as described below.
nAdjusting the volume of the different speakers
1
Press ZONE SELECT to switch the
zone mode to J
(MAIN ZONE).
The J indicator lights.
2
Press AMP to set the remote
control unit to AMP-operation
mode.
3
Press CH LEVEL.
Front L
Front R
-8.0dB
-12.0dB
Subwoofer
Subwoofer
0.0dB
ON
CHANNEL LEVEL
4
Use ui to select the speaker.
The speaker that can be set switches each time one of the
buttons is pressed.
5
Use o p to adjust the volume.
•You can directly turn “OFF” the subwoofer outputs during
2-channel playback in DIRECT or STEREO mode.
Select “Subwoofer” and use o p to select “ON” or “OFF”.
Front L
Front R
-8.0dB
-12.0dB
Subwoofer OFF
CHANNEL LEVEL
When a headphone jack is inserted, the headphone channel level can
be adjusted.
nAdjusting the volume of groups of speakers
(Fader function)
This function lets you adjust (fade) the sound all at once from the
front (front speaker / front height speaker / front wide speaker /
center speaker) or rear (surround speaker / surround back speaker).
1
Press ZONE SELECT to switch the zone mode to
J
(MAIN ZONE).
The J indicator lights.
2
Press AMP to set the remote
control unit to AMP-operation
mode.
3
Press CH LEVEL.
4
Press i to select “Fader”, then
select the item to be adjusting
using o p.
CHANNEL LEVEL
Front L
Front R
-8.0dB
-12.0dB
Fader Front Rear
0.0dB
0.0dB
Surround L
Center
Subwoofer
-12.0dB
Surround R -10.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
Surr. Back L
Surr. Back R
5
Use o p to adjust the volume of the speakers.
(o : front, p: rear)
•The fader function does not affect the subwoofer.
•The fader can be adjusted until the volume of the speaker is adjusted
to the lowest value of –12 dB.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
BD
73
Convenient functions
Quick select function
All of the settings in step 1 can be memorized together. By memorizing
frequently used settings, you can quickly access and enjoy a playback
environment that is consistently the same.
nSaving the settings
1
Set the items below to the settings you want to save.
q Input source
z
(vpage28)
w Volume (vpage29)
e Surround mode (vpage53)
r Video Select (vpage91)
t Audyssey Settings
(Audyssey MultEQ
®
XT, Audyssey
Dynamic EQ
®
, Audyssey Dynamic
Volume
®
) (vpage100)
z The “NET/USB” source of MAIN ZONE can even memorize the
menu screen of each content (Internet Radio, Media Server,
iPod/USB, etc.).
2
Press and hold the desired QUICK SELECT until
“Memory” appears on the display.
The current settings will be memorized.
GQuick select defaultsH
Input source Volume
QUICK SELECT 1 BD –40 dB
QUICK SELECT 2 SAT/CBL –40 dB
QUICK SELECT 3 GAME1 –40 dB
QUICK SELECT 4 NET/USB (iPod/USB) –40 dB
nRecalling the settings
Press QUICK SELECT at which the
settings you want to call out are saved.
Naming quick select settings
See “Quick Select Name” (vpage116).
•The Quick Select function can be set separately for the different
zones (vpage83 “Quick select function”).
•If QUICK SELECT on the main unit is pressed, the same function as
with the remote control unit can be obtained.
NOTE
Input sources stored with the quick select function cannot be selected
if they have been deleted at “Source Delete” (vpage115). In this
case, store them again.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
BD
74
Convenient functions
REC OUT mode
When using the audio/video recording connectors (DVR outputs), you
can record the audio or video from a different program source while
listening to the currently played track.
1
Press ZONE2 / REC SELECT
until “RECOUT SOURCE” is
displayed.
The indicator illuminates.
ZONE2 SOURCE ZONE2 TUNER ZONE2 NET/USB
····
RECOUT NET/USB RECOUT DOCK RECOUT SOURCE
····
2
Press ZONE2 / REC SELECT to choose the input
source to be recorded.
•For operating instructions, refer to the respective device’s
operating instructions.
3
Start recording.
•For operating instructions, refer to the respective device’s
operating instructions.
•To cancel, press ZONE2 / REC SELECT until “ZONE2 SOURCE” is
displayed.
•Make a test recording before starting the actual recording.
•Signals are only output to the analog REC OUT connectors when
the digital signals input to the digital input connectors (OPTICAL/
COAXIAL) are PCM (2-channel) signals.
•Sources selected with the REC OUT mode are output from ZONE2
as well.
•The operable buttons on the remote control unit in REC OUT mode
while it is in the operating mode for ZONE2 are as follows:
•ZONE/DEVICE power button
•Muting button
•Master volume control button
NOTE
•Recordings you make are for your personal enjoyment and should
not be used for other purposes without permission of the copyright
holder.
•Input sources for which “Delete” is selected at “Source Delete”
(vpage115) cannot be selected.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
BD
75
Convenient functions
AirPlay
Enjoy music from your iTunes library with DENON quality sound
anywhere in your home.
Use the Apple Remote app
z
for iPhone, iPod touch and iPad to control
iTunes from any room in your home.
z Available as a free download from the App Store.
nSetting procedure
1
Install iTunes 10, or later, on a Mac or Windows PC
that is connected to the same network as this unit.
2
Turn this unit ON.
Set “Network Standby” to “ON” for this unit.
NOTE
When “Network Standby” is set to “ON”, the unit consumes
more standby power.
3
Launch iTunes and click the AirPlay icon
displayed in the lower right of the window and select
this unit from the list.
4
Choose a song and click play in iTunes.
The music will stream to this unit.
nMultiple Speakers
You can easily stream music from iTunes to multiple speakers in
your home.
1
Click the AirPlay icon and select “Multiple
Speakers” from the list.
2
Check the speakers you want to use.
Master Volume
Multiple Speakers
My Computer
This Computer
DENON:[AVR-3312]
AirPlay Device
nStreaming music stored in iPhone, iPod touch,
or iPad directly to the unit
If you update your “iPhone/iPod touch/iPad” to iOS 4.2.1 or later,
you can stream music stored in your “iPhone/iPod touch/iPad”
directly to this unit.
1
Tap the AirPlay icon .
2
Select the speaker you want to use.
Cancel
DENON:[AVR-3312]
nRemote operations
You can use your DENON remote control to play and pause iTunes,
as well as skip to next and previous tracks.
1
Open Preferences in iTunes, and click “Devices”.
2
Check “Allow iTunes control from remote speakers”.
OK Cancel?
iTunes
Forget All Remotes
Delete Backup
Warn when more than 5% of the data on this computer will be changed
Look for remote speakers connected with AirPlay
Allow iTunes control from remote speakers
Look for iPod touch, iPhone and iPad Remotes
Prevent iPods, iPhones, and iPads from syncing automatically
Device backups:
General Playback Sharing Store Parental Control Advanced
Devices
Reset Sync History
• is displayed on the menu screen while
AirPlay is being operated.
•Source input will be switched to “NET/USB”
when AirPlay playback is started.
•You can stop AirPlay playback by pressing the o or choosing other
input source.
•To see song and artist names together, press STATUS on the main
unit.
•For information about how to use iTunes, also see the Help for
iTunes.
•The screen may differ depending on the OS and software versions.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
BD
76
Party mode function
The same network audio (Internet radio, Media server or iPod DIRECT)
can be played on multiple DENON products equipped with the Party
Mode function and connected in a network.
The party mode consists of one organizer and up to four attendees.
When one unit starts the party mode as the organizer, up to four
devices on which the party mode function is activated automatically
participate in the party as attendees. “Party Mode Function”
(vpage112) must be set to “ON” ahead of time in order to use the
party mode function.
nStarting the party mode as the organizer
1
Press PARTY to become the
organizer.
“Enter Party Mode?” is displayed.
•An error message is displayed when you are
not connected to a network.
2
Press o p to select “Yes”, then
press ENTER.
•The input source automatically
switches to “NET/USB” and the
attendees are automatically selected.
•When a device becomes an organizer,
appears on the display.
3
Play the desired track.
Canceling the party mode
1
While in the party mode, press
PARTY.
“Exit Party Mode?” is displayed on the
menu screen.
2
Press o p to select “Yes”, then
press ENTER.
“Power off attendees component?” is
displayed.
3
Press o p to select “Yes” or
“No”, then press ENTER.
Yes
The power of the attendees is turned off and the party
mode is canceled.
No
The party mode is canceled without turning off the
power of the attendees.
nParticipating in the party mode as an attendee
•When the organizer starts the party mode, up to four attendees are
selected automatically. No operation is required.
•When a device becomes an attendee, appears on the
display.
The input source automatically switches to “NET/USB” and the
same network audio as on the organizer is played.
•If there are fewer than four attendees, a device can join the party
mode after it has started. To participate in the party mode, perform
the operation described below.
1
Press PARTY.
“Enter Party Mode?” is displayed.
•An error message is displayed when you are
not connected to a network.
2
Press o p to select “Yes”, then
press ENTER.
When you start the party mode, the
monitor of the attendee (child) displays
the network menu screen for the
organizer (parent).
Convenient functions
3
Press uio p and ENTER to select the desired
track.
PARTY
ATTENDEE
DENON:[AVR-3312]
Favorites
Internet Radio
Media Server
[1/3]
The party mode function can only be used on a combination of DENON
devices that are equipped with the party mode function.
Canceling the party mode
1
While in the party mode, press
PARTY.
“Exit Party Mode?” is displayed on the
menu screen.
2
Press o p to select “Yes”, then
press ENTER.
In this case, the other devices remain in
the party mode.
“Flickr”, “Last.fm”, “Napster” and “USB” are not available in the
Party Mode.
There can only be one organizer in the network. To form a new party
mode, first cancel the current party mode.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
BD
77
Zone Management function
The status of devices connected to the same network can be
displayed. Additionally, network menu browsers and volume controls
can be performed via the network for the connected devices. This is
useful when playing back network services of a device located in a
separate room.
Only devices compatible with the Zone Management function can be
operated. With the Zone Management function, the network menu
screen and playback screen of the target device to be controlled are
displayed but playback with this unit is not possible. If you also want to
play the same music as the other device, use the Party Mode function.
1
Press ui to select “Network Setup” – “Other” –
“Zone Management” from the menu, and then press
ENTER or p.
OTHER
Character
PC Language
Friendly Name Edit
Zone Management
Party Mode Function
Update Notification
Check the status of other D&M products on
your network and browse the network menu
2
Press ui to select the Friendly Name of the device,
and then press ENTER or p.
ZONE MANAGEMENT
DENON:[AVR-3312]
DENON:[RCD-N7]
RETURN
Return
Check status and select device for content browsing.
•Displays up to a maximum of 10 DENON products connected on
the same network.
3
Press ui to select “Device Control”, and then press
ENTER.
When the device control mode is started, the network menu
of the connected device is displayed on this unit’s television
screen.
DENON:[AVR-3312]
Model
Power
Select Source
Volume Level
AVR-3312
ON
NET/USB
-20.0dB
RETURN
Return
Device Control
Enter
Start device control
NOTE
•If the selected device is compatible with the Zone Management
function, “Device Control” mode starts.
•If the selected device is in Party Mode or being controlled with
Zone Management, “Device Control” is not displayed.
4
Press uio p and ENTER to select the desired track.
Vol.down
CH+
Vol.up
MENU
Exit
CH-
REMOTE CONTROL
DENON:[AVR-3312]
Favorites
Internet Radio
Media Server
[1/6]
Flickr
Last.fm
Napster
•When in device control mode, is displayed on the
television screen of the controlling device, and is displayed
on the television screen of the device being controlled.
Convenient functions
The zone management function can only be used on a combination
of DENON devices that are equipped with the zone management
function.
NOTE
•The volume of the selected device can be controlled using CH +
(volume up) and CH – (volume down) of this unit, but the volume
level is not displayed. Be careful not to increase the volume too high.
•For services that require an account, set the account settings on the
target device in advance. Also, some functions of the device may be
restricted in “Device Control” mode.
nTo end “Device Control” mode
1
Press MENU in “Device Control”
mode.
“Exit Device Control mode?” is
displayed on the TV screen.
2
Press o p to select “Yes”, then
press ENTER.
“Power off Remote component?” is
displayed on the TV screen.
3
Press o p to select “Yes” or “No”, then press ENTER.
Yes
Turns off the target device and ends “Device Control”
mode.
No
Ends “Device Control” mode without turning off the
power off the target device.
“Device Control” mode can also be ended from the controlled device
side.
q Press MENU on the controlled device.
w When “Exit Device Control mode?” is displayed on the TV
screen, select “Yes” and then press ENTER.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
BD
78
Operating a media controller to play music and still pictures
•Perform this procedure using a media controller conforming to the DLNA (Digital Living Network Alliance)
standard.
•This function allows you to play content located on a computer (media server) or connected on a network
by operating a media controller on the same network.
•There are two types of operations on the media controller.
nPlaying content on a computer (Media server)
Windows7 PC
(Windows Media Player 12)
Streaming Streaming
This unit
q Select content.
w Select a player.
e Start playback.
r Operate.
Wireless LAN-
compatible router
Computer
(Media server)
Media controller
1
From the media controller, browse the media server on the same network and
choose the content you want to play.
2
From the media controller, select this unit from among the products on the network.
Playback of the content selected in step 1 begins.
•When selecting this unit from the media controller, the name of this unit is displayed at “Friendly
Name” (vpage112 “Friendly Name Edit”).
•The following operations are possible from the media controller:
•File operations (play, stop, pause, track search)
•Play mode settings (repeat/random)
•Volume adjustment
nPlaying contents on a media controller
Windows7 PC
(Windows Media Player 12)
This unit
q Select content.
w Select a player.
e Start
playback.
r Operate.
Wireless LAN-
compatible router
Media controller
1
Select the content you want to play from among the media controller.
2
From the media controller, select this unit from among the products on the network.
Playback of the content selected in step 1 begins.
•When selecting this unit from the media controller, the name of this unit is displayed at “Friendly
Name” (vpage112 “Friendly Name Edit”).
•The following operations are possible from the media controller:
•File operations (play, stop, pause, track search)
•Play mode settings (repeat/random)
•Volume adjustment
• is displayed on the menu screen while the media controller is being operated.
•For the various settings and operating procedures, see the operating instructions of the media controller
being used.
•When selecting this unit from the media controller, the name of this unit is displayed at “Friendly Name”.
“Friendly Name” can be edited at “Friendly Name Edit” (vpage112) as desired so that it is easily
distinguishable from other devices.
•When playback is started from the media controller, this unit’s input source automatically switches to
“NET/USB”. Also, when the “Network Standby” setting (vpage 112) is set to “ON”, the power
automatically turns on.
NOTE
When operations related to browsing or playback (play, stop, pause, track search) are performed on this
unit while operating the media controller, the connection to the network is disconnected. The network
connection is also disconnected when the party mode is started.
Convenient functions
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
BD
79
Web control function
You can operate this unit using a browser.
1
Switch the “Network Standby” setting to “ON”
(vpage 112).
2
Check the IP address of this unit with “Network
Info.” (vpage 113).
NETWORK INFO.
DHCP
IP Address
MAC Address
ON
0005cd000000
Friendly Name DENON:[AVR-3312]
192.168.100.19
RETURN
Return
Checking the IP address.
3
Enter the IP address of this unit in browser’s address
box.
For example, if the IP address of this unit is “192.168.100.19”,
enter “http://192.168.100.19/”.
http://192.168.100.19/index.asp
INDEX
File
Edit View Tools HelpFavorites
MAIN ZONE
-20.0dB
Status
ZONE2
-40dB
Status
Web Controller
DENON:[AVR-3312]
Web Controller Config.
Setup Menu
ZONE3
-40dB
Status
q
q Entering the IP address.
4
When the top menu is displayed, click on the menu
item you want to operate.
http://192.168.100.19/index.asp
INDEX
File
Edit View Tools HelpFavorites
MAIN ZONE
-20.0dB
Status
ZONE2
-40dB
Status
Web Controller
DENON:[AVR-3312]
Web Controller Config.
Setup Menu
ZONE3
-40dB
Status
w
e
r
w Click when you operate each zone. (vGExample 1H)
e Click when you operate the setup menu. (vGExample 2H)
r Click to change the Web control screen setting.
(vGExample 3H)
5
Operate.
GExample 1H Main zone control screen
MAIN ZONE
POWER
BD
SOURCE
MAIN ZONE Sleep Timer
MOVIE
Player
Video
Network
Tuner
-20.0dB
SORROUND STEREO
Note
To use the web control function,set the GUI menu “System Setup” - “Network Setup” - “Other” -“Network Standby” setting to “ON”
-80 18100-10-20-30-40-50-60-70
QUICK SELECT
>
><
ON STANDBY
MUSIC GAME
ON OFF
CHANNEL LEVEL
>
ZONE CONTROL
>
NET AUDIO / USB
>
iPod Dock
>
iPod Direct
>
RELOAD
Add To Your Favorite
Top Menu
t
y
u
Q2
o
Q1
Q0
i
t Click to perform individual operations.
Changes to individual operation screens. (vGExample 4H)
y Click when you update to the latest information.
Normally, there is a change to the latest information each time
you operate. When operating from the main unit, click this or else
the screen will not be updated.
u Click to add a setting to “Favorites” in your browser.
We recommend registering the setting screens for the different
zones in the browser’s favorites so as not to accidentally perform
menu operations for zones you do not intend to operate.
i Click to return to the top menu.
Displayed when setting “Top Menu Link Setup” to “ON” in
GExample 3H
o Click when you perform a power operation of the unit.
Q0 Click an icon to change the input source.
Q1 Click “v” and then select a surround mode from the displayed
items.
Q2 To adjust the main volume, click “<”, “>”, or the volume
display.
Convenient functions
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
vSee overleaf
BD
80
Convenient functions
GExample 2H Setup menu screen
SETUP MENU
SOURCE SELECT
Source
Input Assign
Video
Video Select
BD
SOURCE
AUTO
Video Mode
Video Convert
i/p Scaler
Resolution (analog)
Resolution (HDMI)
Progressive Mode
Aspect
Auto Game
ON OFF
Movie
Analog Analog & HDMI OFF
Auto 480p/576p 1080i 720p 1080p 1080p:24Hz
Auto 480p/576p 1080i 720p 1080p 1080p:24Hz
AUTO VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2
Full Normal
Input Mode
Input Mode
AUTO
Decode Mode
SOURCE SELECT
SURROUND MODE
AUDIO/VIODE ADJUST
SYSTEM SETUP
INFORMATION
SAVE
LOAD
ReLoad
Rename
Source Level(analog)
0
Set
dB
<
<
Source Level(digital)
0
Set
dB
<
<
Q3
Q5
Q6
Q7
Q4
Q3 Click the menu item from which you want to make settings.
The display on the right becomes the individual setting screens.
Q4 Click “SAVE” when you want to save settings, and click
“LOAD” when you want to call settings.
Q5 Click “v” and select from the displayed items.
Q6 Click an item to make a setting.
Q7 Enter figures or click “<” or “>” to make the setting, and then
click “Set”.
GExample 3H Web configuration screen
Top Menu Link Setup
Back Top Menu
ON OFF
Web Controller Config.
Q8
Q9
Q8 Click “ON” when performing Top Menu Link Setup.
When set up, return to the top menu from each operation screen.
(Default setting : “OFF”)
Q9 Click this item to return to the top menu.
GExample 4H Net Audio operating screen
NET AUDIO/USB(MAIN ZONE)
CONTROL REPEAT RANDOM
-20.0dB
PRESET PRESET MEMORY CHARACTER SORT
OFF OFF
-80 18100-10-20-30-40-50-60-70
QUICK SELECT
>
><
MEMORY
ONOFFALLONE OFF
StartParty End(Att ON) End(Att OFF)
CHANNEL LEVEL
>
ZONE CONTROL
>
NET AUDIO / USB
>
iPod Dock
>
iPod Direct
>
RELOAD
Back
[1/6]
DENON:[AVR-3312]
>Favorites
Internet Radio
Media Server
Flickr
Last.fm
Napster
W0
W5W4
W1 W2 W3
W0 Click the menu items. from which you want to play.
W1 Click “v” to select the preset channel you want to play.
W2 When registering presets, click “v” to select the channel you
want to register, and then click “MEMORY”.
W3 When searching using an acronym, click “v” and select from the
displayed characters.
W4 Click this item to play back repeatedly.
W5 Click this item to play back randomly.
Various memory functions
nPersonal memory plus function
This function sets the settings (input mode, surround mode, HDMI
output mode, MultEQ
®
XT, Dynamic EQ
®
, audio delay etc.) last
selected for the individual input sources.
The surround parameters, tone settings and the volumes of the
different speakers are stored for the individual surround modes.
nLast function memory
This function stores the settings which were made before going
into the standby mode.
When the power is turned back on, the settings are restored.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
BD
81
Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3 (Separate room)
•You can operate this unit so as to enjoy audio in a room (ZONE2, ZONE3) other than the MAIN ZONE
(room where the unit is located).
•You can simultaneously play back the same source in both the MAIN ZONE, ZONE2 and ZONE3. You can
also play back separate sources in the MAIN ZONE, ZONE2 and ZONE3.
The source selected for ZONE2 is also output from the recording output connectors.
Audio output
There are two methods to do this, as described below. Choose one of the methods.
q Zone playback by speaker output
w Zone playback by audio output (PRE OUT)
Use an external amplifier.
q Zone playback by speaker output
The ZONE2 and ZONE3 audio signals are output from this unit’s SURR.BACK/AMP ASSIGN speaker
terminals using the amplifier assignment function.
nConnecting and setting the speakers
“Amp Assign” setting (vpage104)
and audio signals output
Connecting the speakers
ZONE2
ZONE2
Output signal :
Stereo (L / R)
ZONE2
w q w q
(L) (R)
ZONE3 ZONE3
Output signal :
Stereo (L / R)
ZONE3
w q w q
(L) (R)
ZONE2
and
ZONE3
Z2/Z3 (M)
Output signal :
Monaural
ZONE2
w q
ZONE3
w q
w Zone playback by audio output (PRE OUT)
nAudio connections (ZONE2, ZONE3)
The audio signals of this unit’s ZONE2 and ZONE3 audio output terminals are output to the ZONE2 and
ZONE3 amplifiers and played on these amplifiers.
AUX INAUX IN
R
L
R
L
MAIN ZONE
ZONE2 ZONE3
This unit
We recommend using high quality pin-plug cables for audio connections in order to prevent noise.
NOTE
•When the input source to which the digital input connectors (OPTICAL/COAXIAL) are assigned is selected
in ZONE2 or ZONE3, playback is only possible if the digital signal being input is in PCM (2-channel) format.
•It is not possible to play the digital audio signals input from the HDMI terminals in ZONE2 and ZONE3.
Use analog connections for ZONE2 or ZONE3 playback.
•When certain digital signals are being input, noise may be output from the ZONE2 and ZONE3 audio
output connectors.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
BD
82
Playback
1
Press ZONE SELECT to switch the
zone mode to K (ZONE2) or L
(ZONE3).
Input source
select buttons
2
Press AMP to set the remote
control unit to AMP-operation
mode.
3
Press ZONE/DEVICE Z to turn on
the ZONE2 or ZONE3 power.
The or indicator on the
display lights.
•Also press input source select button when
in standby mode, the power turns on.
•When ZONE/DEVICE X is pressed, ZONE2
or ZONE3 turns off.
•Power in ZONE2 or ZONE3 can be turned
on or off by pressing ZONE2 ON/OFF or
ZONE3 ON/OFF on the main unit.
4
Press the input source select
button.
The audio signal of the selected source
is output to ZONE2 or ZONE3.
•To perform an operation with the main unit, press
ZONE2 / REC
SELECT
or ZONE3 SELECT many times.
When power for both MAIN ZONE and ZONE2 (ZONE3) is set to ON,
power of the MAIN ZONE only can be turned off. Select J (MAIN
ZONE) in step 1 then press ZONE/DEVICE X.
Adjusting the volume
Use M df to adjust the volume.
GAdjustable rangeH
– – –
–80dB – –40dB – 18dB
(When the “Volume Display” (vpage115) setting is “Relative”)
GAdjustable rangeH
0 41 99
(When the “Volume Display” (vpage115) setting is “Absolute”)
•At time of purchase, “Volume Limit” (vpage 114) is set to
“–10dB (71)”.
Turn MASTER VOLUME after pressing ZONE2 / REC SELECT or ZONE3
SELECT
on the main unit to adjust the sound volume.
Turning off the sound temporarily
Press N.
The sound is reduced to the level set at “Mute Level” (vpage114)
in the menu.
•To cancel, either adjust the volume or press N again.
•The setting is canceled when the zone’s power is turned off.
You can adjust the tone and volume for ZONE2 and ZONE3 in “Zone
Setup” (vpage114) in the menu.
Video output
Video Connection
The video signals of this unit’s ZONE2 video output terminal are
played by the ZONE2 TV.
VIDEO
IN
ZONE2
VIDEO
MAIN ZONE
ZONE2
This unit
NOTE
•It is not possible to output video signals input to the HDMI or
component terminals to ZONE2.
•The menu screen is not output.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
vSee overleaf
BD
83
Quick select function
It is also possible to save four settings for ZONE2 or ZONE3.
nSaving the settings
1
Set the items below to the settings you want to save.
q Input source (vpage82)
w Volume (vpage82)
NOTE
The settings for each content (Internet Radio, Media Server,
iPod, etc.) cannot be memorized for the “NET/USB” source of
ZONE2 or ZONE3.
2
Press ZONE SELECT to switch the
zone mode to K (ZONE2) or L
(ZONE3).
3
In the zone mode for which
you want to operate, press and
hold the desired QUICK SELECT
until “Memory” appears on the
display.
The current settings will be memorized.
GQuick select defaultsH
Input source Volume
ZONE2/ZONE3 QUICK SELECT 1 BD –40dB
ZONE2/ZONE3 QUICK SELECT 2 SAT/CBL –40dB
ZONE2/ZONE3 QUICK SELECT 3 GAME1 –40dB
ZONE2/ZONE3 QUICK SELECT 4 NET/USB –40dB
Sleep timer function
This is useful when you want to sleep while listening in ZONE2 or
ZONE3.
1
Press ZONE SELECT to switch the
zone mode to K (ZONE2) or L
(ZONE3).
2
Press SLEEP and display the time
you want to set.
•The time switches as shown below each
time SLEEP is pressed.
OFF 10 min 20 30 40 50
6080 7090100
110
120
To confirm the countdown time before putting the
unit to sleep
Press SLEEP.
“Z2 Sleep : zmin” or “Z3 Sleep : zmin” appears on the display.
z Countdown time
To cancel the sleep timer
Press SLEEP to set “OFF”.
The sleep timer is also canceled when this unit is set to the standby
mode or the ZONE2 or ZONE3 power is turned off.
nRecalling the settings
1
Press ZONE SELECT to switch the
zone mode to K (ZONE2) or L
(ZONE3).
2
Press QUICK SELECT at which
the settings you want to call out
are saved.
Naming quick select settings
See “Quick Select Name” (vpage116).
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
BD
84
Menu map
For menu operation, connect a TV to this unit and display the menu on the TV screen. For menu operations, see the following page.
How to make detailed settings
Setting items Detailed items Description Page
SOURCE SELECT
Displayed items of the “SOURCE
SELECT” menu differs, depending
on the selected input source.
Input Assign Changes input connector assignment. 90
Video Makes the video settings.
91
Input Mode Sets the audio input mode and decode mode.
93
Rename Changes the display name for this source.
93
Source Level Adjusts the playback level of the audio input.
93
Play Displays the playback screen of each input source.
93
Still Picture Makes settings for still picture playback.
94
Playback Mode Makes settings for iPod, USB memory device or network source playback.
94
Auto Preset Uses the auto preset function to program radio stations.
94
Preset Skip Sets the preset memories that you do not want to display when tuning.
95
Preset Name Assigns name to a preset memory.
95
SURROUND MODE Selects a listening mode.
53
AUDIO/VIDEO ADJUST Audio Adjust Adjusts various audio parameters.
97
Picture Adjust Adjusts the picture quality.
102
SETUP WIZARD Perform the installation, connection, and setup procedures to prepare the unit for
operation following guidance.
C 4
SYSTEM SETUP Speaker Setup Sets the speaker size and distance, the channel level, etc.
104
HDMI Setup Makes settings for HDMI video/audio output.
107
Audio Setup Makes settings for audio playback.
109
Network Setup Makes network settings.
110
Zone Setup Makes settings for audio playback in a multi-zone (ZONE2/ZONE3) system.
114
Option Setup Makes various other settings.
115
Language Sets the language for display the menu on the TV screen.
118
INFORMATION Status Shows information about current settings.
119
Audio Input Signal Shows information about audio input signals.
119
HDMI Information Displays the HDMI input/output signals and HDMI monitor information.
119
Auto Surround Mode Displays the settings stored for the auto surround mode.
119
Quick Select Displays the settings stored for the Quick Select function.
119
Preset Channel Shows information about tuner or network preset channels.
119
Items that only need to be set
once
Set these for example upon purchase.
Once these items are set, there is
no need to set them again unless
the speaker layout or the connected
speakers have been changed.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
BD
85
Examples of menu screen displays
Typical examples are described below.
GExample 1H Menu selection screen (Top menu)
SPEAKER SETUP
Auto Setup
Amp Assign
Speaker Config.
Bass Setting
Distance
Channel Level
Make detailed speaker settings
q List of GUI menu setup icons
w Currently selected setup icon
e Currently selected setup item
r List of currently selected setup
subcategory
t Guide text for the currently selected
setup item
Press i to select “
and then press p.
(Or press ENTER.)
y
u
AUDIO/VIDEO ADJUST
Audio Adjust
Picture Adjust
Adjust various audio and video parameters
r
e
q
w
y Selected setup item
u Options of the selected setup icon
t
GExample 2H Audyssey
®
Auto Setup screen
(with illustration)
AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP
1 2 3 4 5 6
Amp Assign
RETURN
Auto Setup Start
Channel Select
STEP1 Preparation
Connect the speakers and place them according
to the recommendations in the manual,
Set the following items
If necessary.
Start Auto Setup
Enter Cancel
o
Q3
Q1
Q0
Q2
i History icon
o Operation guidance text
Q0 Operation step indicators
Q1 Illustration
Q2 Operation button guidance
Q3 Guide text for the currently selected setup item
i
n Icon
Proceed to the subcategory
Selected item
Switch the selected item
(Use i to switch.)
(Use
p or ENTER to switch.)
(Use
u to switch.)
n List
Input Assign
Video
Input Mode
Rename
Source Level (analog)
Source Level (digital)
Input Setup
Proceed to the
subcategory
•Switch the selected item using ui.
Selected item
(Use p or ENTER to switch.)
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
BD
86
Examples of menu and front display
Below we describe typical examples of displays on the TV screen and on the set’s display window.
Menu display Front display Description
Top menu display
AUDIO/VIDEO ADJUST
Audio Adjust
Picture Adjust
Adjust various audio and video parameters
w
w
A/V Adjust –
Setup Wizard
q Press MENU to display the menu screen.
w TV screen: Displays the selected line.
Display: Displays the selected item.
•Use ui to move to the item you want to set.
Display when changing settings
Default
BD
DVD
TV
SAT/CBL
DVR
GAME1
GAME2
HDMI1
HDMI2
None
HDMI3
HDMI4
HDMI5
HDMI6
None
COAX1
OPT1
COAX2
OPT2
None
None
None
COMP1
None
COMP2
None
None
None
INPUT ASSIGN
[1/2]
HDMI
DIGITAL COMP
RETURN
Cancel
EnterSelect
Change HDMI input connector assignment
q
HDMI1
HDMI2
None
HDMI3
HDMI4
HDMI5
HDMI6
None
COAX1
OPT1
COAX2
OPT2
None
None
None
COMP1
None
COMP2
None
None
None
INPUT ASSIGN
[1/2]
HDMI
DIGITAL COMP
RETURN
Cancel
EnterSelect
Assign HDMI 1 input connector
Default
BD
DVD
TV
SAT/CBL
DVR
GAME1
GAME2
w
Press ENTER.
q
BD [HDMI1 ]
DVD [HDMI2 ]
e
BD •HDMI1
Press ENTER.
q TV screen: Displays the selected line.
Display: Displays the selected item.
•Use
ui to move to the item you want to set.
w Press ENTER to set to the mode in which the setting can be made.
e 0 1 is displayed at the sides of items whose setting can be
changed. Use o p to change to the desired setting.
Display when resetting
TUNER
PHONO
CD
BD
DVD
TV
SAT/CBL
RENAME
[1/2]
RETURN
Return
Enter
Yes
No
Return all settings to the default?
w
Default
TUNER
PHONO
CD
BD
DVD
TV
SAT/CBL
Press ENTER.
TUNER
PHONO
CD
BD
DVD
TV
SAT/CBL
RENAME
[1/2]
RETURN
Return
Enter
q
Default
TUNER
PHONO
CD
BD
DVD
TV
SAT/CBL
w
Default?
Yes or No:•No
q
Default
TUN <TUNER >
Press ENTER.
q Press
u to select “Default”, then press ENTER.
w Press o to select “Yes”, then press ENTER.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
BD
87
Inputting characters
You can change the names as desired using the “Preset Name”
(vpage 95), “Rename” (vpage 93), “Napster Account”
(vpage 113), “Last.fm Account” (vpage 113), “Zone Rename”
(vpage 116), “Quick Select Name” (vpage 116) and character
input for the network functions.
For inputting characters, there are three methods, as shown below.
Method for inputting characters
Method Operations
Using the keyboard
screen
•Operating with the remote control unit.
•Select a character on the TV screen to
input characters.
Using the number
buttons
(10 Key input screen)
•Operating with the remote control unit.
•Multiple characters are assigned to
a button, and each time the button is
pressed, a character is switched.
Using the cursor buttons
(10 Key input screen)
•Operating with the remote control unit.
•Use
uio p and ENTER to input
characters.
Keyboard screen
nDisplay of a keyboard input screen
[1/2]
RENAME
BD
a/A
SPACE
INSERT DELETE O K
RETURN
InputSelect Cancel
SEARCH
10Key
SHIFT
a/A
A
N
0
$
B
O
1
%
C
P
2
&
D
Q
3
'
E
R
4
(
F
S
5
)
G
T
6
*
H
U
7
+
I
V
8
,
J
W
9
;
K
X
!
<
L
Y
"
=
M
Z
#
>
BD
q
w
e
r
Q0
t
y
u o
i
q Character input section (Maximum 8 characters)
w Cursor
e Keyboard section
r Uppercase and lowercase switch key
t Space key
y Cursor keys
u Insert key
i Delete key
o OK key
Q0 Guide for operation buttons
Using the keyboard screen
1
Display the screen for inputting
characters
(vpage 84
“Menu map”).
2
Select a character to be changed.
q Press uio p to select or
.
w Press ENTER to place the
cursor at the character to be
changed.
Each time ENTER is pressed, the
cursor moves by one character.
3
Select a character to be input with uio p then
press ENTER.
•The types of characters that can be input are as shown below.
GUpper case characters/Numbers/SymbolsH
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123456789
! “ # $ % & ’ ( )
z
+ , ; < = >
GLower case characters/Numbers/SymbolsH
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
0123456789
. @ - _ / : ˜ ? [ \ ] ^ ` { | }
•When you press
SHIFT while you type in, you can change
uppercase characters to lowercase and vice versa.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to change the name.
5
Use uio p to select
O K
, then press ENTER.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
vSee overleaf
BD
88
Inputting characters
10 Key input screen
nDisplay of a 10 Key input screen
TUNER
PHONO
CD
BD
DVD
TV
SAT/CBL
RENAME
[1/2]
RETURN
Cancel
EnterInput
CH+
Insert
CH-
Delete
SEARCH
0-9
Keyboard
Default
TUNER
PHONO
CD
BD
DVD
TV
SAT/CBL
q
w
q Character input section (Maximum 8 characters)
w Guide for operation buttons
Using the number buttons
1
Display the screen for inputting
characters
(vpage 84
“Menu map”).
2
Press SEARCH while a keyboard
screen is displayed.
A 10 Key input screen is displayed.
•When a button from
0 – 9 is pressed while
the soft keyboard screen is being displayed,
the screen switches to the 10 Key input
screen.
3
Place the cursor at the character to be changed with
o p and press the number button (0 9) until the
desired character is displayed.
•The types of characters that can be input are as shown below.
1 . @ - _ / : ˜ M N O m n o 6
A B C a b c 2 P Q R S p q r s 7
D E F d e f 3 T U V t u v 8
G H I g h i 4 W X Y Z w x y z 9
J K L j k l 5
0 (Space) ! “ # $ % & ‘ ( )
z
+ ,
; < = > ? [ \ ] ^ ` { | }
•When you press
SHIFT while you type in, you can change
uppercase characters to lowercase and vice versa.
•For entering the characters assigned to one number button
continuously, press p to move the cursor to the right after entering
a character then enter the next character.
•For entering characters assigned to separate buttons, press the
number button continuously. The cursor automatically moves to
the next position, and the entered character is registered.
4
Repeat step 3 to change the name then press ENTER
to register it.
Example: For changing the input source from “DVD” to “DENON”
q Place the cursor at “V”.
DVD
w Press
twice.
DED
“V” changes to “E”.
e Press
twice.
DEN
“E” is automatically registered, and “D” changes
to “N”.
r Press p.
DEN
“N” is registered.
t Press
three times.
DENO
Input “O”.
y Press p.
DENO
“O” is registered.
u Press
twice.
DENON
Input “N”.
i Press
ENTER to register the input source name.
Using the cursor buttons
1
Display the screen for inputting characters
(vpage 84 “Menu map”).
2
Press SEARCH while a keyboard screen is displayed.
A 10 Key screen is displayed.
3
Use o p to set the cursor to the character you want
to change.
4
Use ui to change the character,
then press ENTER.
•The types of characters that can be input
are as shown below.
GUpper case charactersH
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
GLower case charactersH
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
GSymbolsH ! “ # $ % & ‘ ( )
z
+ , - . / : ; <
= > ? @ [ \ ] ^ _ ` { | } ˜
GNumbersH
0123456789 (Space)
•When you press
SHIFT while you type in, you can change
uppercase characters to lowercase and vice versa.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 to change the name then press
ENTER to register it.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
BD
89
SOURCE SELECT
Perform settings related to input source playback.
•You do not have to change the settings to use the unit. Make settings when needed.
Menu operation
1
Press ZONE SELECT to switch the zone mode to J
(MAIN
ZONE).
The J indicator lights.
2
Press AMP to set the remote control unit to AMP-operation
mode.
3
Press MENU.
The menu is displayed on the TV screen.
4
Use ui to select the menu to be set or operated.
5
Press ENTER or p to enter the setting.
•To return to the previous item, press RETURN B.
•Exiting the Menu, press MENU while the menu is displayed.
The menu display disappears.
Important information
nAbout the display of input sources
In this section, the configurable input sources for each item are shown as follows.
BD
DVD
TV
SAT/CBL
DVR
GAME1
GAME2
V.AUX
DOCK
NET/USB
Favorites
Internet Radio
Media Server
USB/iPod
Flickr
Last.fm
Napster
TUNER
PHONO
CD
NOTE
Input sources that have been set to “Delete” at “Source Delete” (vpage115) cannot be selected.
Items that can be set with the “SOURCE SELECT” procedure
Input Assign (vpage90)
Video (vpage91)
Input Mode (Audio) (vpage93)
Rename (vpage93)
Source Level (Audio) (vpage93)
Play (vpage93)
Still Picture (vpage94)
Playback Mode (vpage94)
Auto Preset (vpage94)
Preset Skip (vpage95)
Preset Name (vpage95)
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
BD
90
SOURCE SELECT
Setting items Setting details
HDMI
Set this to change the HDMI
input connectors assigned
to the input sources.
BD
DVD
TV
SAT/CBL
DVR
GAME1
GAME2
V.AUX
DOCK
HDMI 1 / HDMI 2 / HDMI 3 / HDMI 4 / HDMI 5 / HDMI 6 / HDMI 7
None : Do not assign an HDMI input connector to the selected input
source.
•At time of purchase, the settings of the different input sources are as
shown below.
Input source BD DVD TV SAT/CBL DVR
Default
setting
HDMI
1
HDMI
2
None
HDMI
3
HDMI
4
Input source GAME1
GAME2 V.AUX
DOCK
Default
setting
HDMI
5
HDMI
6
HDMI
7
None
•An input source to which an HDMI input connector cannot be assigned
is displayed as “– – –”.
•To play the video signal assigned at “HDMI” combined with the audio
signal assigned at “Input Assign“ – “DIGITAL”, select “Digital” at “Input
Mode” (vpage93).
•The audio signals input from the analog and digital connectors are not
output to the monitor.
•When a control dock for iPod is connected, signals cannot be assigned
to the HDMI connectors.
•When “HDMI Control” – “Control” (vpage 108) is set to “ON”,
HDMI input connector cannot be assigned to “TV”.
Input Assign
Examples of “Input Assign” menu screen displays
This screen appears when the “SOURCE SELECT” – “each input source” – “Input Assign” menu is
selected. Use the “Input Assign” menu to change the w HDMI input connectors, e Digital input
connectors, and r component input connectors that are assigned to the q input sources in default
settings.
HDMI1
HDMI2
None
HDMI3
HDMI4
HDMI5
HDMI6
None
COAX1
OPT1
COAX2
OPT2
None
None
None
COMP1
None
COMP2
None
None
None
INPUT ASSIGN
[1/2]
HDMI
DIGITAL COMP
RETURN
Return
EnterSelect
Change HDMI input connector assignment
Default
BD
DVD
TV
SAT/CBL
DVR
GAME1
GAME2
ew
q
r
Input assignments menu operations
1
Use uio p to move the highlight to the item you want to set.
2
Press ENTER, then use o p to select the input connector to be
assigned.
3
Press ENTER to register the setting.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
vSee overleaf
BD
91
Setting items Setting details
DIGITAL
Set this to change the digital
input connectors assigned
to the input sources.
BD
DVD
TV
SAT/CBL
DVR
GAME1
GAME2
V.AUX
DOCK
CD
COAX (coaxial) 1, 2 / OPT (optical) 1, 2
None : Do not assign a digital input connector to the selected input source.
•At time of purchase, the settings of the different input sources are as
shown below.
Input source BD DVD TV SAT/CBL DVR
Default
setting
None
COAX
1
OPT
1
COAX
2
OPT
2
Input source GAME1 GAME2 V.AUX
DOCK
CD
Default
setting
None None None None None
COMP
(Component video)
Set this to change the
component video input
connectors assigned to the
input sources.
BD
DVD
TV
SAT/CBL
DVR
GAME1
GAME2
V.AUX
DOCK
COMP (Component video) 1, 2
None : Do not assign a component video input connector to the selected
input source.
•At time of purchase, the settings of the different input sources are as
shown below.
Input source BD
DVD TV
SAT/CBL
DVR
Default
setting
None
COMP
1
None
COMP
2
None
Input source GAME1 GAME2 V.AUX
DOCK
Default
setting
None None None None
•An input source to which an component video input connector cannot be
assigned is displayed as “– – –”.
•When a control dock for iPod is connected, signals cannot be assigned to
the component video connectors.
Default
The “Input Assign” settings
are returned to the default
settings.
Yes : Reset to the defaults.
No : Do not reset to the defaults.
If you select “Default” and press ENTER, the
message “Return all settings to the default?”
is displayed. Select “Yes” or “No”, and then
press ENTER.
SOURCE SELECT
Video Default settings are underlined.
Set the source video.
z “TV”, “GAME1” or “GAME2” can be set when “HDMI” (vpage 90) or “COMP” (vpage 91)
has been assigned.
Setting items Setting details
Video Select
Video of another input
source is played back
combined with the playing
audio.
SOURCE : Play the picture and sound of the input source.
BD / DVD / TV / SAT/CBL / DVR / GAME1 / GAME2 / V.AUX / DOCK
: Select video input source to view. This can be set for individual input
sources.
“TV”, “GAME1” and “GAME2” can be selected only when a
component video is assigned as an input source.
NOTE
•It is not possible to select HDMI input signals.
•Input sources for which “Delete” is selected at “Source Delete”
(vpage115) cannot be selected.
Video Mode
Make settings for video
processing.
BD
DVD
TV
z
SAT/CBL
DVR
GAME1
z
GAME2
z
V.AUX
DOCK
Auto : Process video automatically based on the HDMI content
information.
Game : Always process video appropriate for game content.
Movie : Process video normally.
•If “Video Mode” is set to “Auto”, the mode is switched according to the
input contents.
•If a source is played in both MAIN ZONE (audio and video) and ZONE2
(audio only) modes in the same room, audio in MAIN ZONE and ZONE2
modes may sound out of synchronization, but this is not malfunction. In
this case, setting to “Game” mode may improve audio synchronization.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
vSee overleaf
BD
92
SOURCE SELECT
Setting items Setting details
Resolution
Set the output resolution.
You can set “Resolution”
separately for HDMI output
of the analog video input
and HDMI input.
BD
DVD
TV
z
SAT/CBL
DVR
GAME1
z
GAME2
z
V.AUX
DOCK
NET/USB
Auto : The number of pixels the TV connected to the HDMI output
connector supports is detected automatically and the appropriate output
resolution is set.
480p/576p / 1080i / 720p / 1080p / 1080p:24Hz : Set the output resolution.
•This item can be set when “i/p Scaler” is set to anything other than
“OFF”.
•When “i/p Scaler” is set to ”Analog & HDMI”, the resolution of both the
analog video input signal and HDMI input signal can be set.
•To watch 1080p/24Hz pictures, use a TV that supports 1080p/24Hz video
signals.
•When set to “1080p:24Hz”, you can enjoy film-like pictures for film
sources (in 24 Hz). For video sources and mixed sources, we recommend
setting the resolution to “1080p”.
•It is not possible to convert a 50 Hz signal into 1080p/24Hz. It is output
at a resolution of 1080p/50Hz.
Progressive Mode
Set an appropriate
progressive conversion
mode for the source video
signal.
BD
DVD
TV
z
SAT/CBL
DVR
GAME1
z
GAME2
z
V.AUX
DOCK
Auto : The video signal is automatically detected and the appropriate
mode is set.
Video1 : Select mode suitable for video playback
Video2 : Select mode suitable for video and 30-frame film material
playback.
This item can be set when “i/p Scaler” is set to anything other than
“OFF”.
Aspect
Set the aspect ratio for the
video signals output to the
HDMI.
BD
DVD
TV
z
SAT/CBL
DVR
GAME1
z
GAME2
z
V.AUX
DOCK
NET/USB
Full : Output at 16:9 aspect ratio.
Normal : Output at 4:3 aspect ratio.
“Aspect” can be set when “i/p Scaler” is set to anything other than
“OFF”.
z “TV”, “GAME1” or “GAME2” can be set when “HDMI” (vpage 90) or “COMP” (vpage 91)
has been assigned.
Setting items Setting details
Video Convert
The input video signal is
converted automatically
in conjunction with
the connected TV
(vpage5 “Converting
input video signals for
output (Video conversion
function)”).
BD
DVD
TV
z
SAT/CBL
DVR
GAME1
z
GAME2
z
V.AUX
DOCK
ON : The input video signal is converted.
OFF : The input video signal is not converted.
•When a non-standard video signal from a game machine or some other
source is input, the video conversion function might not operate. In this
case set “Video Convert” to “OFF”.
•When “Video Convert” is set to “OFF”, the video conversion function
does not work. In this case, connect this unit and TV with the same type
of cable.
i/p Scaler
Convert the input source’s
resolution to the resolution
set at “Resolution”.
BD
DVD
TV
z
SAT/CBL
DVR
GAME1
z
GAME2
z
V.AUX
DOCK
NET/USB
Analog : Use i/p scaler function for analog video signal.
Analog & HDMI : Use i/p scaler function for analog and HDMI video signal.
HDMI : Use i/p scaler function for HDMI video signal.
OFF : Do not use i/p scaler function.
•“Analog & HDMI” and “HDMI” can be set for input sources for which an
HDMI input connector is assigned.
•Which items can be set depend on the input source assigned to each
input connector.
•This function is not effective when the input signal is “x.v.Color”, 3D,
sYCC 601 color, Adobe RGB color, Adobe YCC 601 color or computer
resolution.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
BD
93
Input Mode (Audio) Default settings are underlined.
The input modes available for selection may vary depending on the input source.
Setting items Setting details
Input Mode
Set the audio input modes
for the different input
sources.
It is normally recommended
to set the audio input mode
to “Auto”.
Auto : Automatically detect input signal and perform playback.
HDMI : Play only signals from HDMI input.
Digital : Play only signals from digital input.
Analog : Play only signals from analog input.
•“HDMI” can be set for input sources for which “HDMI” is assigned at
“Input Assign” (vpage90).
•“Digital” can be set for input sources for which “DIGITAL” is assigned
at “Input Assign” (vpage91).
•If the input source is set to “TV”, “GAME1” or “GAME2”, it cannot be
set to “Analog”.
•When digital signals are properly input, the indicator lights on
the display. If the indicator does not light, check the digital input
connector assignment and the connections.
•If “HDMI Control” – “Control” is set to “ON” and a TV compatible with
the ARC is connected via the HDMI MONITOR connectors, the input
mode whose input source is “TV” is fixed to ARC.
Decode Mode
Set the audio decode mode
for input source.
BD
DVD
TV
SAT/CBL
DVR
GAME1
GAME2
V.AUX
DOCK
CD
Auto : Detect type of digital input signal and decode and play automatically.
PCM : Decode and play only PCM input signals.
DTS : Decode and play only DTS input signals.
•This item can be set for input sources for which “HDMI” or “DIGITAL”
is assigned at “Input Assign” (vpage90).
•Normally set this mode to “Auto”. Set “PCM” and “DTS” when
inputting the corresponding input signal.
SOURCE SELECT
Rename
Change the display name of the selected input source.
Setting items Setting details
Rename
Change the display name of
the selected input source.
•Up to eight characters can be input.
•For character input, see page87.
Default
The input source name
is returned to the default
setting.
Yes : Reset to the defaults.
No : Do not reset to the defaults.
If you select “Default” and press ENTER, the
message “Return all settings to the default?”
is displayed. Select “Yes” or “No”, and then
press ENTER.
Source Level (Audio) Default settings are underlined.
•This function corrects the playback level of the selected input source’s audio input.
•Make this setting if there are differences in the input volume levels between the different sources.
Setting details
–12dB – +12dB (0dB)
The analog input level and digital input level can be adjusted independently for input sources for
which “HDMI” or “DIGITAL” is assigned at “Input Assign” (vpage90).
Play
Displays the playback screen of each input source.
DOCK
NET/USB
Favorites
Internet Radio
Media Server
USB/iPod
Flickr
Last.fm
Napster
TUNER
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
BD
94
Still Picture Default settings are underlined.
Make settings for playing back still picture images.
Setting items Setting details
Slide Show
Make slide show settings.
NET/USB
ON : Display still picture images in a slide show.
OFF : The slide show is not played back.
Interval
Set the time for displaying a
single image when playing
back images in the slide
show.
NET/USB
5s60s
Playback Mode Default settings are underlined.
nInput source : “DOCK”
Setting items Setting details
Repeat
Make settings for repeat
mode.
DOCK
All : All files are played repeatedly.
One : A file being played is played repeatedly.
OFF : Repeat playback mode is canceled.
Shuffle
Make settings for shuffle
mode.
DOCK
Songs : Shuffle songs.
Albums : Shuffle albums.
OFF : Shuffle playback mode is canceled.
SOURCE SELECT
nInput source : “NET/USB”
Setting items Setting details
Repeat
Make settings for repeat
mode.
Media Server
USB/iPod
Napster
All : All files are played repeatedly (All files in a Folder or an album are
played repeatedly).
One : A file being played is played repeatedly.
OFF : Repeat playback mode is canceled.
Random
Make random mode
settings.
Media Server
USB/iPod
Napster
ON : Enable random playback.
OFF : Disable random playback.
Auto Preset
Use the auto preset function to program radio stations.
Setting items Setting details
Start
Start the auto preset
process.
TUNER
If an FM station cannot be preset automatically, select the desired
station by tuning it in manually, then preset it manually.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
BD
95
SOURCE SELECT
Preset Skip Default settings are underlined.
Set preset channel to be skipped when selecting.
Setting items Setting details
A – G
Set the preset channels you
do not want to display. You
can set by preset memory
block (A to G) or by preset
channel (1 to 8).
TUNER
All : Skip all channels of the selected preset memory blocks.
•ON : All of the preset channels from 1 to 8 of the selected preset
memory blocks are all set to “ON”.
•Skip : All of the preset channels from 1 to 8 of the selected preset
memory blocks are all set to “Skip”.
1 – 8 : Set by individual preset channels in the currently selected preset
memory block.
•ON : Display the selected preset channel.
•Skip : Do not display the selected preset channel.
When preset channels 1 to 8 are set to “Skip”, blocks (A – G) can be
skipped.
Preset Name
Assign name to a preset memory.
Setting items Setting details
A1 – G8
Change the display name of
the selected channel.
TUNER
•Up to eight characters can be input.
•For character input, see page87.
Default
The changed preset name
is returned to the default
setting.
Yes : Reset to the defaults.
No : Do not reset to the defaults.
When you select “Default” and press ENTER,
the “Return all settings to the default?”
prompt is displayed. Select either “Yes” or
“No”, and press ENTER.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
BD
96
AUDIO/VIDEO ADJUST
Sound field effects for surround sound and video quality can be adjusted.
Menu operation
1
Press ZONE SELECT to switch the zone mode to J
(MAIN
ZONE).
The J indicator lights.
2
Press AMP to set the remote control unit to AMP-operation
mode.
3
Press MENU.
The menu is displayed on the TV screen.
4
Use ui to select the menu to be set or operated.
5
Press ENTER or p to enter the setting.
•To return to the previous item, press RETURN B.
•Exiting the Menu, press MENU while the menu is displayed.
The menu display disappears.
Items that can be set with the “AUDIO/VIDEO ADJUST” procedure
Audio Adjust (vpage97)
n Surround Parameters (vpage97)
n Tone (vpage99)
n Audyssey Settings (vpage100)
n A-DSX Soundstage (vpage101)
n Manual EQ (vpage101)
n RESTORER (vpage102)
n Audio Delay (vpage102)
Picture Adjust (vpage102)
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
BD
97
Audio Adjust
nSurround Parameters
Default settings are underlined.
The items (parameters) that can be adjusted depend on the signal being input and the currently
set surround mode. For details on the adjustable parameters, see “Surround modes and surround
parameters” (vpage133).
NOTE
•Some setting items cannot be set while playback is stopped. Make the settings during playback.
•You cannot set the surround parameters in the PURE DIRECT mode.
Setting items Setting details
Mode
Set the play modes for the
different surround modes.
n In the PLgx or PLg mode
Cinema : Surround sound mode optimized for movie sources.
Music : Surround sound mode optimized for music sources.
Game : Surround sound mode optimized for games.
Pro Logic : Dolby Pro Logic playback mode (PLg mode only).
n In the PLgz mode
Height : Dolby PLgz Height playback mode.
n In the DTS NEO:6 mode
Cinema : Surround sound mode optimized for movie sources.
Music : Surround sound mode optimized for music sources.
•When “Surround Parameters” – “PLgz Height” (vpage98) is set to
“ON”, the “Height” mode is set automatically.
•The “Music” mode is also effective for movie sources including a lot of
stereo music.
Cinema EQ
Soften the treble range
of movie soundtracks for
better understanding.
ON : “Cinema EQ” is used.
OFF : “Cinema EQ” is not used.
DRC
Compress dynamic range
(difference between loud
and soft sounds).
Auto : Automatic dynamic range compression on/off control according to
source. This can be set in the Dolby TrueHD mode.
Low / Middle / High : These set the compression level.
OFF : Dynamic range compression always off.
D.COMP
Compress dynamic range
(difference between loud
and soft sounds).
OFF : Turn dynamic range compression off.
Low / Middle / High : These set the compression level.
AUDIO/VIDEO ADJUST
Setting items Setting details
LFE
Adjust the low-frequency
effects level (LFE).
–10dB – 0dB
For proper playback of the different sources, we recommend setting
to the values below.
•Dolby Digital sources : “0dB”
•DTS movie sources : “0dB”
•DTS music sources : “–10dB”
Center Image
Assign center channel
signal to front left and right
channels for wider sound.
0.0 – 1.0 (0.3)
Panorama
Assign front L/R signal also
to surround channels for
wider sound.
ON : Set.
OFF : Do not set.
Dimension
Shift sound image center
to front or rear to adjust
playback balance.
0 – 6 (3)
Center Width
Assign center channel
signal to front left and right
channels for wider sound.
0 – 7 (3)
Delay Time
Adjust delay time to control
sound stage size.
0ms – 300ms (30ms)
Effect Level
Adjust effect signal level.
1 – 15 (10)
Set to a lower level if the positioning and sense of phase of the
surround signals seems unnatural.
Room Size
Determine size of acoustic
environment.
Small : Simulate acoustics of a small room.
Medium small : Simulate acoustics of a medium-small room.
Medium : Simulate acoustics of a medium room.
Medium large : Simulate acoustics of a medium-large room.
Large : Simulate acoustics of a large room.
NOTE
“Room Size” does not indicate the size of the room in which sources are
played.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
vSee overleaf
BD
98
AUDIO/VIDEO ADJUST
Setting items Setting details
Height Gain
Control the front height
channel volume.
Low : Reduce the front height channel volume.
Middle : Front height channel sound is output with standard sound
volume.
High : Increase the front height channel volume.
NOTE
“Height Gain” is displayed for the following settings.
•When the “Speaker Config.” – “Front Height” setting (vpage105) is
set other than to “None”.
•When surround mode is “PLgz” or the PLgz decoder is used.
PLgz Height
Determine whether to use
front height channel.
ON : Audio is output from the front height speaker.
OFF : Audio is not output from the front height speaker.
NOTE
•“PLgz Height” is displayed with the settings listed below.
•When the “Speaker Config.” – “Front Height” setting (vpage105)
is set to other than “None”.
•“PLgz Height” cannot be set if the HD Audio source being played
includes a front height channel. In this case, the Front height channel
is played back without decoding in PLgz mode, using the input signal.
AFDM
(Auto flag detect mode)
Detect the source’s
surround back channel
signal and set the
optimum surround mode
automatically.
ON : Set.
OFF : Do not set.
[Example] Playing Dolby Digital software (with EX flag)
•When “AFDM” is set to “ON”, the surround mode is automatically set
to the DOLBY D + PLgx C mode.
• To play in the DOLBY DIGITAL EX mode, set “AFDM” to “OFF” and
“Surround Parameters” – “Surround Back” to “MTRX ON”.
Some Dolby Digital EX sources do not include EX flags. If the playback
mode does not switch automatically even when “AFDM” is set to
“ON”, set “Surround Parameters” – “Surround Back” to “MTRX ON”
or “PLgx CINEMA”.
Setting items Setting details
Surround Back
Sets the method of
generating of the surround
back channel.
n For 2-channel sources
ON : The surround back channel is used.
OFF : No signal is played from the surround back channels.
n For multi-channel sources
Set the decoding method for the surround back channel.
ON
z1
: Convert the 5.1-channel source of the DTS/DTS-HD input
signals to the 7.1-channel output recommended by DTS and then play.
MTRX ON : Generate and play the surround back channel signals from
the surround channel signals by means of the Dolby Digital EX decoder.
ES MTRX
z2
: Generate and play the surround back channel signals
from the surround channel signals of the DTS source by means of the
DTS-ES decoder.
PLgx CINEMA
z3
: Generate and play the surround back signals by
decoding the signals in the Dolby Pro Logic gx Cinema mode.
PLgx MUSIC : Generate and play the surround back signals by
decoding the signals in the Dolby Pro Logic gx Music mode.
OFF : Do not play the surround back channel.
z1 This can be selected when playing the 5.1-channel source of DTS/
DTS-HD.
z2 This can be selected when playing DTS sources.
z3 This can be selected when “Speaker Config.” – “Surr.Back”
(vpage105) is set to “2spkrs”.
If the source being played contains a surround back signal, the decoder
type is automatically selected by the AFDM function. Set “AFDM” to
“OFF” to switch to your preferred decoder.
NOTE
If the setting in “Speaker Config.” – “Surr.Back” (vpage 105) is
“None”, “Surround Back” is not displayed.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
vSee overleaf
BD
99
AUDIO/VIDEO ADJUST
Setting items Setting details
Speaker
Make settings for the
speakers outputting sound
when playing back in
DENON original surround
mode.
Surround Back : Sound is output from the surround back speakers.
Height : Sound is output from the front height speakers.
Wide : Sound is output from the front wide speakers.
OFF : Sound is not output from the surround back speakers, front wide
speakers and front height speakers.
NOTE
Only speakers that are set to something other than “None” in “Speaker
Config.” (vpage104) can be selected.
Subwoofer
Turn subwoofer output on
and off.
ON : The subwoofer is used.
OFF : The subwoofer is not used.
NOTE
This can be set when the surround mode is “DIRECT” (vpage53) and
the “Subwoofer Mode” (vpage105) is “LFE+Main”.
Default
The “Surround Parameters”
settings are returned to the
default settings.
Yes : Reset to the defaults.
No : Do not reset to the defaults.
When you select “Default” and press ENTER,
the “Return all settings to the default?”
prompt is displayed. Select either “Yes” or
“No”, and press ENTER.
nTone
Adjust the tonal quality of the sound.
Setting items Setting details
Tone Control
Set the tone control function
to ON and OFF.
ON : Allow tone adjustment (bass, treble).
OFF : Playback without tone adjustment.
“Tone Control” can be set when “Dynamic EQ
®
” (vpage100) is
set to “OFF”.
NOTE
•“Tone Control” settings are not reflected to ZONE2 and ZONE3.
•The tone cannot be adjusted in the “DIRECT” mode.
Bass
Adjust low frequency range
(bass).
–6dB – +6dB
“Bass” can be set when “Tone Control” is set to “ON”.
Treble
Adjust high frequency range
(treble).
–6dB – +6dB
“Treble” can be set when “Tone Control” is set to “ON”.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
vSee overleaf
BD
100
AUDIO/VIDEO ADJUST
nAudyssey Settings
Default settings are underlined.
Set Audyssey MultEQ
®
XT, Audyssey Dynamic EQ
®
and Audyssey Dynamic Volume
®
. These can be
selected after Audyssey
®
Auto Setup has been performed. For additional information on Audyssey
technology, please see page141.
NOTE
•If you have not performed Auto Setup, or if you change the speaker settings after performing Auto Setup,
you may not be able to select Dynamic EQ
®
/Dynamic Volume
®
.
In this case, either perform Audyssey
®
Auto Setup over again or perform “Restore” (vpage27) to
return to the settings after Audyssey
®
Auto Setup was run.
•When HD Audio for which the sampling frequency exceeds 96 kHz is played back, the “Audyssey
Settings” cannot be set.
Setting items Setting details
MultEQ
®
XT
MultEQ
®
XT corrects
both time and frequency
response problems in the
listening area based on
Audyssey
®
Auto Setup
calibration. We recommend
“Audyssey”.
MultEQ
®
XT is the
prerequisite function for
Dynamic EQ
®
and Dynamic
Volume
®
.
Audyssey : Optimize the frequency response of all speakers.
Audyssey Byp.L/R : Optimize frequency response of speakers except
front L and R speakers.
Audyssey Flat : Optimize frequency response of all speakers to flat
response.
Manual : Apply frequency response set with “Manual EQ” (vpage101).
OFF : Turn “MultEQ
®
XT” equalizer off.
•“Audyssey”, “Audyssey Byp. L/R” and “Audyssey Flat” can be selected
after Audyssey
®
Auto Setup has been performed. “Audyssey” is
automatically selected after performing Audyssey
®
Auto Setup. When
“Audyssey”, “Audyssey Byp. L/R” or “Audyssey Flat” is selected,
illuminates.
•After running Audyssey
®
Auto Setup, if the Speaker Configuration,
Distance, Channel Level, and Crossover Frequency have changed
without increasing the number of speakers measured, only
illuminates.
NOTE
•“MultEQ
®
XT” and “Manual” cannot be selected when “EQ Customize”
is set to “Not Used” (vpage109).
•When using headphones, “MultEQ
®
XT” is automatically set to “OFF”.
“MultEQ
®
XT”, “Dynamic EQ
®
” and “Dynamic Volume
®
” settings are stored for each input source.
Setting items Setting details
Dynamic EQ
®
Solve the problem of
deteriorating sound quality
as volume is decreased
by taking into account
human perception and
room acoustics. Works with
MultEQ
®
XT.
ON : Use Dynamic EQ
®
.
OFF : Do not use Dynamic EQ
®
.
or is displayed when set to “ON”.
Reference Level Offset
Audyssey Dynamic EQ
®
is
referenced to the standard
film mix level. It makes
adjustments to maintain
the reference response
and surround envelopment
when the volume is turned
down from 0 dB. However,
film reference level is not
always used in music or
other non-film content.
Dynamic EQ
®
Reference
Level Offset provides three
offsets from the film level
reference (5 dB, 10 dB, and
15 dB) that can be selected
when the mix level of the
content is not within the
standard.
0dB (Film Ref) : This is the default setting and should be used when
listening to movies.
5dB : Select this setting for content that has a very wide dynamic range,
such as classical music.
10dB : Select this setting for jazz or other music that has a wider dynamic
range. This setting should also be selected for TV content as that is usually
mixed at 10 dB below film reference.
15dB : Select this setting for pop/rock music or other program material
that is mixed at very high listening levels and has a compressed dynamic
range.
Setting is enabled when “Dynamic EQ
®
” is “ON” (vpage100).
Dynamic Volume
®
Solve the problem of large
variations in volume level
between TV, movies and
other content (between
quiet passages and
loud passages, etc.) by
automatically adjusting to
the user’s preferred volume
setting.
Midnight : Most adjustment to loudest and softest sounds.
Evening : Medium adjustment to loudest and softest sound.
Day : Least adjustment to loudest and softest sounds.
OFF : Do not use “Dynamic Volume
®
”.
•
is displayed when set to “Midnight”, “Evening” or “Day”.
•If “Dynamic Volume
®
” is set to “Yes” in Auto Setup (vpage 25),
the setting is automatically changed to “Evening”.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
BD
101
AUDIO/VIDEO ADJUST
nA-DSX Soundstage
Default settings are underlined.
Adjust Audyssey DSX™ setting and sound stage parameters.
Setting items Setting details
Audyssey DSX™
Provides more immersive
surround sound by adding
the new channels.
ON–Height– : Turn on A-DSX processing for height expansion.
ON–Wide– : Turn on A-DSX processing for wide expansion.
OFF : Do not set Audyssey DSX™.
Stage Height
Adjust sound stage height
when using front height
speakers.
–10 – +10 (0)
•“Audyssey DSX™” can be set when you are using front height speakers
or front wide speakers.
•“Audyssey DSX™” is only valid when using a center speaker.
•“Audyssey DSX™” is valid when surround mode is STANDARD mode
other than PLgz Height.
•“A-DSX Soundstage” cannot be configured if the HD Audio source being
played includes Front height and Front wide channels. In this case, the
respective channels are played back using the input signals.
About Audyssey Dynamic Surround Expansion (A-DSX)
Audyssey DSX™ is a scalable surround expansion system that adds
new channels to improve the surround impression. Based on research
in human hearing Audyssey DSX™ adds a pair of Wide channels in the
front because that information is critical in the rendering of a realistic
soundstage.
Audyssey DSX™ then adds a pair of Height channels above the main
front channels to reproduce the next most important acoustical and
perceptual cues related to soundstage depth. In addition to creating
these new channels, Audyssey DSX™ applies Surround Envelopment
Processing to enhance the blend between the front and side/back
surround channels. The result is a much more seamless and enveloping
home theater experience.
Stage Width
Adjust sound stage width
when using front wide
speakers.
–10 – +10 (0)
Manual EQ
Default settings are underlined.
Use the graphic equalizer to adjust the tone of each speaker.
“Manual EQ” can be set when “MultEQ
®
XT” setting (vpage100) is “Manual”.
Setting items Setting details
Curve Copy
Copy “Audyssey Flat” curve
from MultEQ
®
XT.
Yes : Copy.
No : Do not copy.
•“Curve Copy” is displayed after Audyssey
®
Auto Setup has been
performed.
•When you select “Curve Copy” and press ENTER, the “Set EQ curve to
Audyssey Flat?” prompt is displayed. Select either “Yes” or “No”, and
press ENTER.
Default
The “Manual EQ” settings
are returned to the default
settings.
Yes : Reset to the defaults.
No : Do not reset to the defaults.
When you select “Default” and press ENTER,
the “Return all settings to the default?”
prompt is displayed. Select either “Yes” or
“No”, and press ENTER.
Adjust Channel
Correct the tone of each
speaker.
q Select the speaker tone adjustment method.
All : Adjust the tone of all speakers together.
L/R : Adjust the tone of left and right speakers together.
Each : Adjust the tone of each speaker.
w Select the speaker.
e Select the adjustment frequency band.
63Hz / 125Hz / 250Hz / 500Hz / 1kHz / 2kHz / 4kHz / 8kHz / 16kHz
•Select the speakers you want to adjust when “L/R” or “Each” is
selected.
r Adjust the level.
–20.0dB – +6.0dB (0.0dB)
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
BD
102
AUDIO/VIDEO ADJUST
RESTORER
Compressed audio formats such as MP3, WMA (Windows Media Audio) and MPEG-4 AAC reduce the
amount of data by eliminating signal components that are hard for the human ear to hear. The RESTORER
function generates the signals eliminated upon compression, restoring the sound to conditions near those
of the original sound before compression. It also corrects the sense of volume of the bass to obtain richer
sound with compressed audio signals.
Setting details
OFF : Do not use RESTORER.
Mode1 (RESTORER 64) : Optimized mode for compressed sources with very weak highs.
Mode2 (RESTORER 96) : Apply suitable bass and treble boost for all compressed sources.
Mode3 (RESTORER HQ) : Optimized mode for compressed sources with normal highs.
•This item can be set with analog signals or PCM signal (fs = 44.1/48 kHz) is input.
•“RESTORER” settings are stored for each input source.
•This item default setting for “iPod” and “NET/USB” is “Mode3”. All others are set to “OFF”.
•When set to something other than “OFF”, is displayed.
•This cannot be set when the surround mode is set to “DIRECT” or “PURE DIRECT”.
Audio Delay
Default settings are underlined.
While viewing video, manually adjust the time to delay audio output.
Setting details
0ms – 200ms
•This item can be set within the range of 0 to 100 ms when “Auto Lip Sync” (vpage107) is set to
“ON” and when a TV compatible with Auto Lip Sync is connected.
•Store “Audio Delay” for each input source.
•Audio Delay for game mode can be set when “Video Mode” (vpage 91) is set to “Auto” or
“Game”.
Picture Adjust
Default settings are underlined.
Picture quality can be adjusted.
•This item can be set when the input source is
BD
DVD
TV
SAT/CBL
DVR
GAME1
GAME2
V.AUX
DOCK
NET/USB
.
•With input sources other than the ones above, this item can be set when “Video Select” is selected. In
this case, the original input source settings are called out.
•Can be set when the “Video Convert” setting (vpage92) is “ON”.
•“BD”, “TV”, “GAME1” or “GAME2” can be set when “HDMI” (vpage 90) or “COMP”
(vpage91) has been assigned.
Setting items Setting details
Contrast
Adjust picture contrast.
–6 – +6 (0)
Brightness
Adjust picture brightness.
0 – +12
Chroma Level
Adjust picture chroma level
(saturation).
–6 – +6 (0)
Hue
Adjust color hue.
–6 – +6 (0)
DNR
Reduce overall picture
noise.
OFF / Low / Middle / High
Enhancer
Emphasize picture contours.
0 – +12
•“DNR” and “Enhancer” are each effective with HDMI output.
•The value set at “Picture Adjust” is stored in the memory individually for each input source.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
BD
103
SYSTEM SETUP
Set when changing Audyssey
®
Auto Setup settings, or when changing the audio, video, display
or other settings.
•If you change the speaker settings after performing Audyssey
®
Auto Setup, it will not be
possible to set Audyssey MultEQ
®
XT, Audyssey Dynamic EQ
®
and Audyssey Dynamic Volume
®
(vpage100).
•Can be used without changing the settings. Please set if necessary.
Menu operation
1
Press ZONE SELECT to switch the zone mode to J
(MAIN
ZONE).
The J indicator lights.
2
Press AMP to set the remote control unit to AMP-operation
mode.
3
Press MENU.
The menu is displayed on the TV screen.
4
Press ui to select the menu to be set or operated.
5
Press ENTER or p to enter the setting.
•To return to the previous item, press RETURN B.
•Exiting the Menu, press MENU while the menu is displayed.
The menu display disappears.
Items that can be set with the “SYSTEM SETUP” procedure
Speaker Setup (vpage104)
HDMI Setup (vpage107)
Audio Setup (vpage109)
Network Setup (vpage110)
Zone Setup (vpage114)
Option Setup (vpage115)
Language (vpage118)
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
BD
104
Speaker Setup
Default settings are underlined.
Perform when setting the speakers manually or when changing settings made in Audyssey
®
Auto Setup.
•If you change the speaker settings after performing Audyssey
®
Auto Setup, it will not be possible to select
Audyssey MultEQ
®
XT, Audyssey Dynamic EQ
®
and Audyssey Dynamic Volume
®
(vpage100).
•“SYSTEM SETUP” can be used without changing the settings. Please set if necessary.
Setting items Setting details
Amp Assign
The signal output from the
SURR.BACK/AMP ASSIGN
speaker terminal of this unit
can be switched to match
your speaker environment.
NORMAL : Select the “NORMAL” setting to perform 7.1-channel playback
using the surround back, front height, or front wide speakers.
ZONE2 : Select the “ZONE2” setting to assign the unit’s built-in power
amplifier for ZONE2 and output the audio in stereo.
ZONE3 : Select the “ZONE3” setting to assign the unit’s built-in power
amplifier for ZONE3 and output the audio in stereo.
Z2/Z3(M) : Select the “Z2/Z3(M)” setting to assign the unit’s built-in
power amplifier for ZONE2 and ZONE3 and output the audio in monaural.
Bi-AMP : Select the “Bi-AMP” setting to connect the front speakers via
the bi-amp connection.
2CH : When you perform 2-channel playback in the DIRECT or STEREO
mode, select the “2CH” setting to use the other front speakers for
playback.
Front B : Select the “Front B” setting to use the second set of front
speakers for playback. You can switch the front speakers A and B to be
used for playback in accordance with the 2-channel playback or multi-
channel playback mode. When you select this Front B setting, also
perform the “Front Speaker Setup” (vpage107) procedure.
SYSTEM SETUP
Setting items Setting details
Speaker Config.
Select speaker configuration
and size (bass reproduction
capability).
NOTE
Do not use the outward
shape of the speaker to
determine selection of a
“Large” or “Small” speaker.
Instead, use the frequencies
set in “Crossover Freq.”
(vpage107) as the
standard for determining
bass reproduction capability.
Front : Set the front speaker size.
•Large : Use a large speaker that can adequately play back low
frequencies.
•Small : Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for
low frequencies.
•When “Subwoofer” is set to “No”, “Front” is automatically set to
“Large”.
•When “Front” is set to “Small”, “Center”, “Surround“, “Surr.Back”,
“Front Height” and “Front Wide” can not be set to “Large”.
Center : Set the presence and size of the center speaker.
•Large : Use a large speaker that can adequately play back low
frequencies.
•Small : Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for
low frequencies.
•None : Select when a center speaker is not connected.
“Large” is not displayed when “Front” is set to “Small”.
Subwoofer : Set the presence of a subwoofer.
•Yes : Use a subwoofer.
•No : Select when a subwoofer is not connected.
When “Front” is set to “Small”, “Subwoofer” is automatically set to
“Yes”.
Surround : Set the presence and size of the surround speakers.
•Large : Use a large speaker that can adequately play back low
frequencies.
•Small : Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for
low frequencies.
•None : Select when the surround speakers are not connected.
•When “Surround” is set to “Large”, “Surr.Back”, “Front Height” and
“Front Wide” can be set to “Large”.
•When “Surround” is set to “None”, “Surr.Back”, “Front Height” and
“Front Wide” are automatically set to “None”.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
vSee overleaf
BD
105
SYSTEM SETUP
Setting items Setting details
Speaker Config.
(Continued)
Surr.Back : Set the presence, size and number of surround back speakers.
•Large : Use a large speaker that can adequately play back low
frequencies.
•Small : Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for
low frequencies.
•None : Select when the surround back speakers are not connected.
•2spkrs : Use two surround back speakers.
•1spkr : Use only one surround back speaker. When you select this
setting, connect the surround back speaker to the left (L) channel.
Even when the “Surr.Back“ setting is other than “None”, sound
may not be emitted from the surround back speaker, depending on
the playback source. In this case, make “Surround Parameters” –
“Surround Back” setting other than “OFF” (vpage98).
NOTE
When “Amp Assign” setting (vpage 104) is “NORMAL”, you can
make the “Surr.Back” setting.
Front Height : Set the presence and size of the front height speakers.
•Large : Use a large speaker that can adequately play back low
frequencies.
•Small : Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for
low frequencies.
•None : Select when the front height speakers are not connected.
NOTE
When “Amp Assign” setting (vpage104) is “NORMAL”, you can
make the “Front Height” setting.
Front Wide : Set the presence and size of the front wide speakers.
•Large : Use a large speaker that can adequately play back low
frequencies.
•Small : Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for
low frequencies.
•None : Select when the front wide speakers are not connected.
NOTE
When “Amp Assign” setting (vpage 104) is “NORMAL”, you can
make the “Front Wide” setting.
Setting items Setting details
Bass Setting
Set subwoofer and LFE
signal range playback.
Subwoofer Mode : Select low range signals to be reproduced by
subwoofer.
•LFE : The low range signal of the channel set to “Small” speaker size is
added to the LFE signal output from the subwoofer.
•LFE+Main : The low range signal of all channels is added to the LFE
signal output from the subwoofer.
•“Subwoofer Mode” can be set when “Speaker Config.” – “Subwoofer”
(vpage104) is set to “Yes”.
•Play music or a movie source and select the mode offering the strongest
bass.
•Select “LFE+Main” if you want the bass signals to always be produced
from the subwoofer.
NOTE
If “Front” and “Center” for “Speaker Config.” are set to “Large”, and
“Subwoofer Mode” is set to “LFE”, no sound may be output from the
subwoofers, depending on the input signal or selected surround mode.
LPF for LFE : Set LFE signal playback range. Set this when you want to
change the playback frequency of the subwoofer.
•80Hz / 90Hz / 100Hz / 110Hz / 120Hz / 150Hz / 200Hz / 250Hz
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
vSee overleaf
BD
106
SYSTEM SETUP
Setting items Setting details
Distance
Set distance from listening
position to speakers.
Measure beforehand the
distance from the listening
position to each speaker.
Unit : Set the unit of distance.
•Meters / Feet
Step : Set the minimum variable width of the distance.
•0.1m / 0.01m
•1ft / 0.1ft
Default : The “Distance” settings are returned to the default settings.
•Yes : Reset to the defaults.
•No : Do not reset to the defaults.
When you select “Default” and press ENTER,
the “Return all settings to the default?”
prompt is displayed. Select either “Yes” or
“No”, and press ENTER.
Front L / Front R / Center / Subwoofer / Surround L / Surround R /
Surr.Back L
z
/ Surr.Back R
z
/ F.Height L / F.Height R / F.Wide L /
F.Wide R : Select the speaker.
z When the “Speaker Config.” – “Surr.Back” setting (vpage105) is
set to “1spkr”, “Surr.Back” is displayed.
•0.00m18.00m / 0.0ft60.0ft : Set the distance.
•The speakers that can be selected differ depending on the “Amp Assign”
(vpage104) and “Speaker Config.” (vpage104) settings.
•Default settings :
Front L / Front R / Center / Subwoofer / F.Height L / F.Height R / F.Wide L /
F.Wide R : 3.60 m (12.0 ft)
Surround L / Surround R / Surr.Back L / Surr.Back R : 3.00 m (10.0 ft)
•Set the difference in the distance between the speakers to less than
6.00 m (20.0 ft).
NOTE
Speakers set to “None” in “Speaker Config.” (vpage 104) are not
displayed.
Setting items Setting details
Channel Level
Set the volume of the test
tone to be the same when it
is output from each speaker.
Test Tone Start : Output test tone.
•Front L / F.Height L / Center / F.Height R / Front R / F.Wide R /
Surround R / Surr.Back R
z
/ Surr.Back L
z
/ Surround L / F.Wide L /
Subwoofer : Select the speaker.
z When the “Speaker Config.” – “Surr.Back” setting (vpage105) is
set to “1spkr”, “Surr.Back” is displayed.
•–12.0dB – +12.0dB (0.0dB) : Adjust the volume.
When “Channel Level” is adjusted, the adjusted values are set for all the
surround modes. To adjust the channel level separately for the different
surround modes, use the operation see page72.
NOTE
•Speakers set to “None” in the “Speaker Config.” (vpage 104)
settings are not displayed.
•When a headphones jack is inserted in the PHONES jack of this unit, the
“Channel Level” is not displayed.
Default : The “Channel Level” settings are returned to the default settings.
•Yes : Reset to the defaults.
•No : Do not reset to the defaults.
When you select “Default” and press ENTER,
the “Return all settings to the default?”
prompt is displayed. Select either “Yes” or
“No”, and press ENTER.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
vSee overleaf
BD
107
SYSTEM SETUP
Setting items Setting details
Crossover Freq.
Set the maximum frequency
of the bass signal output
from each channel to
the subwoofer. Set the
Crossover Frequency to
suit the bass reproduction
capability of the speaker
being used.
40Hz / 60Hz / 80Hz / 90Hz / 100Hz / 110Hz / 120Hz / 150Hz / 200Hz /
250Hz : Set the crossover frequency.
Advanced : Specify crossover frequency for each speaker.
•Front / Center / Surround / Surr.Back / Front Height / Front Wide
: Select the speaker.
•40Hz / 60Hz / 80Hz / 90Hz / 100Hz / 110Hz / 120Hz / 150Hz / 200Hz /
250Hz : Set the crossover frequency.
•“Crossover Freq.” can be set when the “Bass Setting” – “Subwoofer
Mode” (vpage 105) setting is “LFE+Main”, or when you have a
speaker that is set to “Small”.
•Always set the crossover frequency to “80Hz”. When using small
speakers, however, we recommend setting the crossover frequency to
a higher frequency.
•For speakers set to “Small”, sound below the crossover frequency
is cut from the sound output. The cut bass sound is output from the
subwoofer or front speakers.
•The speakers that can be set when “Advanced” is selected differ
depending on to the “Subwoofer Mode” setting (vpage105).
• When “LFE” is selected, speakers set to “Small” at “Speaker Config.”
can be set. If the speakers are set to “Large”, “Full Band” is displayed
and the setting cannot be made.
• If set to “LFE+Main”, this setting can be made regardless of the
speaker size.
Front Speaker Setup
Set the front speakers to
use for every surround
mode.
NOTE
This can be set when “Amp
Assign” is set to “Front B”
(vpage104).
2CH DIRECT/STEREO : The front speakers used in the direct, stereo and
pure direct play modes (2 channel) are set in advance.
•A : Front speaker A is used.
•B : Front speaker B is used.
•A+B : Both front speakers A and B are used.
MULTI CH : The front speakers used in modes other than the direct,
stereo and pure direct play modes (2 channel) are set in advance.
•A : Front speaker A is used.
•B : Front speaker B is used.
•A+B : Both front speakers A and B are used.
HDMI Setup
Default settings are underlined.
Make settings for HDMI video/audio output.
Setting items Setting details
Auto Lip Sync
Make automatic
compensation for timing
shift in audio and video
output.
ON : Compensated.
OFF : Not compensated.
HDMI Audio Out
Select HDMI audio output
device.
Amp : Play back through speakers connected to the unit.
TV : Play back through TV connected to the unit.
•The audio signal input from the HDMI input connector can be output as
an output signal from the HDMI output connector by setting the HDMI
audio output destination to TV.
Audio signals input via the Analog/Coaxial/Optical input connectors
cannot be output from the HDMI output connector.
•When the HDMI control function is activated, priority is given to the TV
audio setting (vpage70 “HDMI control function”).
Monitor Out
Make settings for HDMI
monitor output.
Auto (Dual) : The presence of a TV connected to the MONITOR 1 or
MONITOR 2 terminal is detected automatically, and that TV connection
is used.
Monitor 1 : A TV connected to the MONITOR 1 terminal is always used.
Monitor 2 : A TV connected to the MONITOR 2 terminal is always used.
•If both the Monitor 1 and 2 connectors are connected and “Resolution”
(vpage92) is set to “Auto”, the signals are output with a resolution
compatible with both TV.
•With “Resolution” (vpage 92) not set to “Auto”, check whether
the TV you are using is compatible with the resolution under “HDMI
Information” – “Monitor 1” and “Monitor 2” (vpage119).
NOTE
Depending on the monitor you have connected, the display may not
be correct when you set to “Auto (Dual)”. In such a case, set to either
“Monitor 1” or “Monitor 2”.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
vSee overleaf
BD
108
SYSTEM SETUP
Setting items Setting details
HDMI Control
You can link operations with
devices connected to HDMI
and compatible with HDMI
Control.
Control : Set the HDMI control function.
•ON : Use HDMI control function.
•OFF : Do not use HDMI control function.
•When a device that is not compatible with the HDMI control function is
connected, set “HDMI Control” – “Control” to “OFF”.
•Please consult the operating instructions for each connected device to
check the settings.
•Refer to “HDMI control function” (vpage 70) for more information
about the HDMI control function.
NOTE
•When “HDMI Control” – “Control” is set to “ON”, it consumes more
standby power. If you are not using this unit for an extended period, it
is recommended that you unplug the power cord from the power outlet.
•“HDMI Control” does not work when the power to the device is off.
Either turn power on or set to standby.
•The HDMI control function controls operations of a TV that is compatible
with the HDMI control function. Make sure that the TV and HDMI are
connected when you perform HDMI control.
•If the “HDMI Control” – “Control” settings have been changed, always
reset the power to connected devices after the change.
Standby Source : Sets the HDMI input source to put into standby when
the power is on.
•Last : This item is set at the last-used input source.
•HDMI1 / HDMI2 / HDMI3 / HDMI4 / HDMI5 / HDMI6 / HDMI7 : Put the
respective input source into standby.
“Standby Source” can be set when “HDMI Control” – “Control” is set
to “ON”.
Setting items Setting details
HDMI Control
(Continued)
Control Monitor : Set the HDMI MONITOR terminal to output the HDMI
control signal.
•Monitor 1 : Output from the MONITOR 1 terminal.
•Monitor 2 : Output from the MONITOR 2 terminal.
•“Control Monitor” can be set when “HDMI Control” – “Control” is set
to “ON”.
•ARC function works only with the terminal selected by “Control
Monitor”.
Power Off Control : Links the power standby of this unit to external
devices.
•All : If power to a connected TV is turned off independently of the input
source, power to this unit is automatically set to standby.
•Video : If power to a connected TV is turned off when the input source
is BD / DVD / TV / SAT/CBL / DVR / GAME1 / GAME2 / V.AUX / DOCK,
power to this unit is automatically set to standby.
•OFF : This unit does not link with power to a TV.
“Power Off Control” can be set when “HDMI Control” – “Control” is
set to “ON”.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
BD
109
SYSTEM SETUP
Audio Setup
Default settings are underlined.
Make settings for audio playback.
Setting items Setting details
2ch Direct/Stereo
Select the method for
setting the speakers used
in the 2-channel direct and
stereo playback modes.
Setting : Select the method for setting the speakers used in the 2-channel
direct and stereo playback modes.
•Basic : The settings at “Speaker Setup” (vpage104) are applied.
•Custom : Make separate settings for 2-channel. Make the following
settings:
Front : Set the front speaker size.
•Large : Use a large speaker that can adequately play back low
frequencies.
•Small : Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for
low frequencies.
If “Speaker Config.” – “Subwoofer” (vpage104) is set to “No”,
the setting is automatically set to “Large”.
Subwoofer : Set the presence of a subwoofer.
•Yes : Use a subwoofer.
•No : Select when a subwoofer is not connected.
If “Speaker Config.” – “Subwoofer” (vpage104) is set to “No”,
the setting is automatically set to “No”. If the “Front” setting is
“Small”, the setting is automatically “Yes”.
SW Mode : Select low range signals to be reproduced by subwoofer.
•LFE : When the “2ch Direct/Stereo” – “Front” setting is set to “Large”,
the LFE signal alone is output from the subwoofer. Also, when the “2ch
Direct/Stereo” – “Front” setting is set to “Small”, the front channel low
range signal is added to the LFE signal output from the subwoofer.
•LFE+Main : The front channel low range signal is added to the LFE signal
output from the subwoofer.
This setting can be set made “2ch Direct/Stereo” – “Subwoofer” is
set to “Yes”.
Crossover : Set the maximum frequency of the bass signal output from
each channel to the subwoofer.
•40Hz / 60Hz / 80Hz / 90Hz / 100Hz / 110Hz / 120Hz / 150Hz / 200Hz /
250Hz
•This setting can be set made “2ch Direct/Stereo” – “Subwoofer” is set
to “Yes”.
•If the “2ch Direct/Stereo” – “Front” setting is “Large” and the “SW
Mode” setting is “LFE”, “Full Band” is displayed and the setting cannot
be made.
Setting items Setting details
2ch Direct/Stereo
(Continued)
Distance FL / Distance FR : Select the speaker.
•0.00m – 18.00m (3.60m) / 0.0ft – 60.0ft (12.0ft) : Set the distance to
the speaker.
Set the difference in the distance between the speakers to less than
6.00 m (20.0 ft).
Level FL / Level FR : Select the speaker.
•–12.0dB – +12.0dB (0.0dB) : Adjust the level of each channel.
Auto Surround Mode
Make setting for
memorizing surround mode
setting for each input signal
type.
ON : Memorize settings. Automatically play with the last used surround
mode.
OFF : Do not memorize settings. Surround mode does not change
according to input signal.
•The auto surround mode function lets you store in the memory the
surround mode last used for playing the four types of input signals listed
below.
q Analog and PCM 2-channel signals
w Dolby Digital and DTS 2-channel signals
e Dolby Digital and DTS multi-channel signals
r LPCM Multi-channel signals
•When playing in PURE DIRECT, the surround mode does not change
even if the input signal is changed.
EQ Customize
Set the disengaged
equalizers to not display
when MultEQ
®
XT is
selected.
The equalizer mode in which
“Not Used” is selected
cannot be stored and
recalled in the Quick Select
function.
Audyssey Byp. L/R : Set when not using “Audyssey Byp. L/R” equalizer.
•Used : Use.
•Not Used : Do not use.
Set so that “Audyssey Byp. L/R” settings can be made when
Audyssey
®
Auto Setup is performed.
Audyssey Flat : Set when not using “Audyssey Flat” equalizer.
•Used : Use.
•Not Used : Do not use.
Set so that “Audyssey Flat” settings can be made when Audyssey
®
Auto Setup is performed.
Manual : Set when not using the “Manual” equalizer.
•Used : Use.
•Not Used : Do not use.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
BD
110
Network Setup
Default settings are underlined.
Make network settings.
Setting items Setting details
Network Connecting
Make settings for wired
LAN.
Only set “Network Connecting” when connecting to a network without a
DHCP function.
Detail
Exit
NETWORK CONNECTING
DHCP
IP Address
OFF
192.168.0.1
Enter
Set IP address and proxy manually
q
Exit
Proxy
NETWORK CONNECTING
DHCP
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
Primary DNS
Secondary DNS
192. 168. 000. 001
255. 255. 255. 000
000. 000. 000. 000
000. 000. 000. 000
000. 000. 000. 000
OFF
RETURN
Cancel
Set IP address manually
w
r
e
q On the menu, select “Network Connecting” –
“Detail” and press ENTER.
w Use uio p to set “DHCP” to “OFF”, then
press ENTER.
The DHCP function is disabled.
SYSTEM SETUP
Setting items Setting details
Network Connecting
(Continued)
e Use uio p or 0 – 9 to input the address and press ENTER.
•IP Address : Set the IP address within the ranges shown below.
The Network Audio function cannot be used if other IP addresses
are set.
CLASS A: 10.0.0.1 – 10.255.255.254
CLASS B: 172.16.0.1 – 172.31.255.254
CLASS C: 192.168.0.1 – 192.168.255.254
•Subnet Mask : When connecting an xDSL modem or terminal
adapter directly to this unit, input the subnet mask indicated in
the documentation supplied by your provider. Normally input
255.255.255.0.
•Default Gateway : When connected to a gateway (router), input its
IP address.
•Primary DNS, Secondary DNS : If there is only one DNS address
indicated in the documentation supplied by your provider, input it at
“Primary DNS”. If there are two or more DNS addresses, input the
first one at “Secondary DNS”.
r Use i to select “Exit” and press ENTER.
Setup is complete.
•When connecting to the network via a Proxy server, select “Proxy” and
press
ENTER (vpage111 “Proxy settings”).
•If you are using a broadband router (DHCP function), there is no need
to make the settings at “IP Address” and “Proxy”, since the DHCP
function is set to “ON” in this unit’s default settings.
•If this unit is being used connected to a network without the DHCP
function, the network settings must be made. In this case, some
knowledge of networks is required. For details, consult a network
administrator.
•If you cannot connect to the Internet, recheck the connections and
settings (vpage19).
•If you do not understand about Internet connection, contact your ISP
(Internet Service Provider) or the store from which you purchased your
computer.
•When you want to cancel the setting during IP address input, press
RETURN B.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
vSee overleaf
BD
111
SYSTEM SETUP
Setting items Setting details
Network Connecting
(Continued)
Proxy settings : Make this setting when connecting to the Internet via a
proxy server.
Detail
Exit
NETWORK CONNECTING
DHCP
IP Address
OFF
192.168.0.1
Enter
Set IP address and proxy manually
q
Exit
Proxy
NETWORK CONNECTING
DHCP
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
Primary DNS
Secondary DNS
192. 168. 000. 001
255. 255. 255. 000
000. 000. 000. 000
000. 000. 000. 000
000. 000. 000. 000
OFF
RETURN
Cancel
Set if using proxy server
Enter
w
q On the menu, select “Network Connecting” –
“Detail” and press ENTER.
w Use ui to set “Proxy” and press ENTER.
Setting items Setting details
Network Connecting
(Continued)
NETWORK CONNECTING
Proxy
Address
Port
Address
00000
Proxy ON
000. 000. 000. 000
Exit
RETURN
Cancel
Proxy server is used
u
y
e
t
r
e Use o p to set “Proxy” to “ON” and press i.
The proxy server is enabled.
r Use
o p to select the proxy server input method, and then press i.
Address : Select when inputting by address.
Name : Select when inputting by domain name.
t Use
uio p or 0 – 9 to input the proxy server address or domain name
and press
ENTER.
When “Address” is selected in step r : Input the address
When“Name” is selected in step r : Input the domain name
•For character input, see page87.
y Use
uio p or 0 – 9 to input the proxy server port number and press
ENTER.
u Use
i to select “Exit” and press ENTER.
Setup is complete.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
vSee overleaf
BD
112
SYSTEM SETUP
Setting items Setting details
Other
Network function on/off
setting during standby, and
PC language setting.
Network Standby : Set the network function on/off during standby.
•ON : Network is on during standby. Main unit operable with a network
compatible controller.
•OFF : Suspend network function during standby.
Set to “ON” when using the web control function.
NOTE
When “Other” – “Network Standby” is set to “ON”, it consumes
more standby power.
Character : When characters are not displayed correctly, set the MP3 ID3-
Tag character code type reproduced by the USB memory device.
•Auto : Auto-select character code.
•Latin : Select ISO 8859-1 Latin-1.
•Japanese : Select Shift-JIS.
If the characters are not properly displayed when set to “Auto”, set to
“Latin” or “Japanese”.
PC Language : Select computer environment language.
•Arabic / Chinese(simplified) / Chinese(traditional) / Czech / Danish /
Dutch / English / Finnish / French / German / Greek / Hebrew /
Hungarian / Italian / Japanese / Korean / Norwegian / Polish /
Portuguese / Portuguese(Brazil) / Russian / Spanish / Swedish /
Turkish
Friendly Name Edit : The Friendly Name is the name of this unit displayed
on the network. Up to 63 characters can be input. The default Friendly
Name on first use is “DENON:[AVR-3312]”.
•For character input, see page87.
Default : Restores Friendly Name, which you had changed, to the default
setting.
•Yes : Reset to the defaults.
•No : Do not reset to the defaults.
When you select “Default” and press ENTER,
the “Return all settings to the default?”
prompt is displayed. Select either “Yes” or
“No”, and press ENTER.
Setting items Setting details
Other
(Continued)
Party Mode Function : Set the Party Mode function.
•ON : Enable party mode function.
•OFF : Disable party mode function.
Refer to page 76, “Party mode function” for more information on
the party mode function.
Party Start Level : Make settings for volume level when the party mode
is started.
•Last : The same volume as set before the party mode was started.
•– – – (0) : Always use the muting on condition when the party mode is
started.
•–80dB18dB (1 99) : Start party mode with your preferred volume.
•This can be set when “Party Mode Function“ is set to “ON“.
•This is displayed from 0 to 99 when “Volume Display” (vpage115)
is set to “Absolute”.
•You can set to the upper limit set with “Volume Limit” (vpage115) .
Zone Management : See “Zone Management function” (vpage77).
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
vSee overleaf
BD
113
SYSTEM SETUP
Setting items Setting details
Other
(Continued)
Update Notification : Displays a notification message on this unit’s menu
screen when the latest firmware is released with “Firmware Update”. The
notification message is displayed for about 20 seconds when the power
is turned on. Connect to broadband Internet (vpage 19) when using
this function.
•ON : Display update message.
•OFF : Do not display update message.
•When you press ENTER during display of the
notification message, the “Check for Update”
screen is displayed (Refer to page117 for more
information on “Firmware Update”).
•Press RETURN B to erase the notification
message.
Upgrade Notification : Display a notification message on this unit’s menu
screen when downloadable firmware is released with “Add New Feature”.
The notification message is displayed for about 20 seconds when the
power is turned on. Connect to broadband Internet (vpage 19) when
using this function.
•ON : Display upgrade message.
•OFF : Do not display upgrade message.
•When you press ENTER during display of the notification message, the
“Add New Feature” screen is displayed (Refer to page 117 for more
information on “Add New Feature”).
•Press RETURN B to erase the notification message.
Setting items Setting details
Napster Account
Set or change Username
and Password
(vpage49 “Listening to
Napster”).
Username / Password / Clear
•For character input, see page87.
Last.fm Account
Set or change Username
and Password
(vpage47 “How to
listen to Last.fm on this
unit”).
Username / Password / Clear
•For character input, see page87.
Last.fm Display
Set whether or not to
display Last.fm item on the
menu.
Display : Display Last.fm item on the menu.
Hidden : Do not display Last.fm item on the menu.
Network Information
Display network information.
Friendly Name / DHCP=ON or OFF / IP Address / MAC Address
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
BD
114
SYSTEM SETUP
Zone Setup
Default settings are underlined.
Set the audio to play back with multi-zone (ZONE2, ZONE3).
•“ZONE2” is displayed when “ZONE2” is selected with “Amp Assign” (vpage104).
•“ZONE3” is displayed when “ZONE3” is selected with “Amp Assign” (vpage104).
Setting items Setting details
Bass
Adjust low frequency range
(bass).
–10dB – +10dB (0dB)
Treble
Adjust high frequency range
(treble).
–10dB – +10dB (0dB)
HPF
Make settings for cutting
the low range to reduce
distortion in the bass.
ON : The low range is attenuated.
OFF : The low range is not attenuated.
Lch Level
Adjust the left channel
output level.
–12dB – +12dB (0dB)
The “Lch Level” can be set when “Channel“ (vpage114) is set to
“Stereo“.
Rch Level
Adjust the right channel
output level.
–12dB – +12dB (0dB)
The “Rch Level” can be set when “Channel“ (vpage114) is set to
“Stereo“.
Channel
Set the signal output from
multi-zone.
Stereo : Select stereo output.
Mono : Select mono output.
When “Amp Assign” (vpage 104) is set to “Z2/Z3(M)”, the
“Channel” setting is automatically set to “Mono”.
Volume Level
Set the volume output level.
Variable : Volume adjustment is enabled by main unit and remote control
unit.
–40dB (41) : Fix volume at –40 dB. Set when adjusting volume by external
amplifier.
0dB (81) : Fix volume at 0 dB. Set when adjusting volume by external
amplifier.
When “Amp Assign” (vpage104) is set to “ZONE2”, “ZONE3”
or “Z2/Z3(M)”, the “Volume Level” setting is automatically set to
“Variable”.
Setting items Setting details
Volume Limit
Make a setting for
maximum volume.
OFF : Do not set a maximum volume.
–20dB (61) / –10dB (71) / 0dB (81)
This is displayed from 0 to 99 when “Volume Display” (vpage115)
is set to “Absolute”.
Power On Level
Define the volume setting
that is active when the
power is turned on.
Last : Use the memorized setting from the last session.
– – – (0) : Always mute when power is turned on.
–80dB – 18dB (1 – 99) : The volume is adjusted to the set level.
This is displayed from 0 to 99 when “Volume Display” (vpage115)
is set to “Absolute”.
Mute Level
Set the amount of
attenuation when muting
is on.
Full : The sound is muted entirely.
–40dB : The sound is attenuated by 40 dB down.
–20dB : The sound is attenuated by 20 dB down.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
BD
115
SYSTEM SETUP
Option Setup
Default settings are underlined.
Make various other settings.
Setting items Setting details
Volume Control
Set the MAIN ZONE (room
where the unit is located)
volume setting.
Volume Display : Set how volume is displayed.
•Relative : Display ---dB (Min), in the range –80.5 dB to 18 dB.
•Absolute : Display in the range 0 (Min) to 99.
•The “Volume Display” setting is applied also to the “Volume Limit” and
“Power On Level” display method.
•The “Volume Display” setting applies to all zones.
Volume Limit : Make a setting for maximum volume.
•OFF : Do not set a maximum volume.
•–20dB (61) / –10dB (71) / 0dB (81)
Power On Level : Define the volume setting that is active when the
power is turned on.
•Last : Use the memorized setting from the last session.
•– – – (0) : Always use the muting on condition when power is turned on.
•–80dB – 18dB (1 – 99) : The volume is adjusted to the set level.
Mute Level : Set the amount of attenuation when muting is on.
•Full : The sound is muted entirely.
•–40dB : The sound is attenuated by 40 dB down.
•–20dB : The sound is attenuated by 20 dB down.
Source Delete
Remove from the display
input sources that are not
used.
BD / DVD / TV / SAT/CBL / DVR / GAME1 / GAME2 / V.AUX / DOCK /
NET/USB / TUNER / PHONO / CD : Select input source that is not used.
•ON : Use this source.
•Delete : Do not use this source.
NOTE
•Input sources being used in the various zones
cannot be deleted.
•Input sources set to “Delete” cannot be
selected using the input source select button.
Setting items Setting details
GUI
Make the settings related to
displays on the TV screen.
Screensaver : Make screensaver settings.
•ON : The screensaver is activated during
menu display, NET/USB, iPod or Tuner screen
display if no operation is performed for an
approximately 5-minute continuous period.
When you press uio p, the screensaver is
cancelled and the screen before that screen
saver started is displayed.
•OFF : Screensaver is not activated.
Wall Paper : Set wallpaper to display in the background when playback
is stopped, etc.
•Picture : Set the background to a picture (DENON logo).
•Black : Set the background to black.
•Gray : Set the background to gray.
•Blue : Set the background to blue.
Format : Set the video signal format to be output for the TV you are using.
•NTSC : Select NTSC output.
•PAL : Select PAL output.
“Format” can also be set by the following procedure. However, the menu
screen is not displayed.
1. Press and hold the main unit’s PRESET 1 and PRESET 3 for at least 3
seconds.
zVideo Format” appears on the display.
2. Press the main unit’s TUNER PRESET CH +, – and set the video signal
format.
3. Press the main unit’s INTERNET RADIO V to complete the setting.
NOTE
When a format other than the video format of the connected TV is set, the
picture will not be displayed properly.
Text : Display the details of operation when switching surround mode,
input mode, etc.
•ON : Turn display on.
•OFF : Turn display off.
Master Volume : Display the master volume during adjustment.
•Bottom : Display at the bottom.
•Top : Display at the top.
•OFF : Turn display off.
When the master volume display is hard to see when superimposed
on movie subtitles, set to “Top”.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
vSee overleaf
BD
116
SYSTEM SETUP
Setting items Setting details
GUI
(Continued)
NET/USB : Set the NET/USB screen display time when the input source
is “NET/USB”.
•Always : Show display continuously.
•30s : Show display for 30 seconds after operation.
•10s : Show display for 10 seconds after operation.
•OFF : Turn display off.
iPod : Set the iPod screen display time when the input source is “DOCK”
or “iPod (USB)”.
•Always : Show display continuously.
•30s : Show display for 30 seconds after operation.
•10s : Show display for 10 seconds after operation.
•OFF : Turn display off.
Tuner : Set the tuner screen display time when the input source is
“TUNER”.
•Always : Show display continuously.
•30s : Show display for 30 seconds after operation.
•10s : Show display for 10 seconds after operation.
•OFF : Turn display off.
Remote Setup Guide
Search a preset code to
register in the remote
control unit.
See “Registering preset codes” (vpage121).
Quick Select Name
Change the “Quick Select”
display title to one you
prefer.
•Up to 16 characters can be input.
•For character input, see page87.
Zone Rename
Change the display title of
each zone to one you prefer.
•Up to 10 characters can be input.
•For character input, see page87.
Setting items Setting details
Trigger Out
Select the condition for
activating Trigger Out 1/2 for
the input source, surround
mode, etc.
See “TRIGGER OUT jacks”
(vpage20) for more
information on trigger out.
Trigger Out 1/Trigger Out 2
n When setting for zone (MAIN ZONE / ZONE2 / ZONE3)
Trigger out is activated through linkage to the power of the zone set
to “ON”.
n When setting for input source
Activate trigger out when the input source set to “ON” is selected.
Active for the zone set to “ON” with “When setting for zone”.
n When setting for surround mode
Activate trigger out when the surround mode set to “ON” is selected.
Active when the “MAIN ZONE” set to “ON” with “When setting
for zone” is selected, and when the input source set to “ON” with
“When setting for input source” is selected.
n When setting for HDMI monitor
Activate trigger out when the HDMI monitor set to “ON” is selected.
Activate trigger out when the HDMI monitor set to “ON” is
selected. Active when the “MAIN ZONE” set to “ON” with
“When setting for zone” is selected, and when the input source
set to “ON” with “When setting for input source” is selected.
•ON : Activate trigger on this mode.
•– – – : Do not activate trigger on this mode.
Dimmer
Adjust the display
brightness of this unit.
Bright : Normal display brightness.
Dim : Reduced display brightness.
Dark : Very low display brightness.
OFF : Turns the display off.
Buttons on the main unit can be used for operations.
Each time DIMMER is pressed, the setting is changed as shown
below.
Bright Dim
DarkOFF
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
vSee overleaf
BD
117
SYSTEM SETUP
Setting items Setting details
Setup Lock
Protect settings from
inadvertent change.
ON : Turn protection on.
OFF : Turn protection off.
When canceling the setting, set “Setup Lock” to “OFF”.
NOTE
When “Setup Lock” is set to “ON”, the settings listed below can no
longer be changed. Also, “SETUP LOCKED!” is displayed if you attempt
to operate related settings.
•Menu operations •Channel Level
Firmware Update
Update the firmware of the
receiver.
Check for Update : Check for firmware updates. You can also check
approximately how long it will take to complete an update.
Start : Execute the update process.
When updating starts, the power indicator becomes red and the menu
screen is shut down. The amount of update time which has elapsed is
displayed.
When updating is complete, the power indicator becomes green and
normal status is resumed.
•If updating fails, the set automatically retries, but if updating is still not
possible, one of the messages shown below is displayed. If the display
reads as shown below, check the settings and network environment,
then update again.
Display Description
Updating fail Updating failed.
Login failed Failure to log into server.
Server is busy Server is busy. Wait a while then try again.
Connection fail Failure in connecting to server.
Download fail Downloading of the firmware has failed.
Setting items Setting details
Add New Feature
Display new features that
can be downloaded to this
unit and perform an update.
Upgrade : Execute the upgrade process.
When updating starts, the power indicator becomes red and the menu
screen is shut down. The amount of update time which has elapsed is
displayed.
When upgrading is complete, the power indicator becomes green and
normal status is resumed.
•If the upgrade is not successful, an error message identical to those in
“Firmware Update” will appear on the display. Check the settings and
network environment, then update again.
Upgrade Status : Display a list of the additional functions provided by the
upgrade.
See the DENON website for details about updates.
When the procedure is complete, “Registered” is displayed in this
menu and updates can be carried out. If the procedure has not been
carried out, “Not Registered” is displayed.
The ID number shown on this screen is needed when carrying out the
procedure.
The ID number can also be displayed by pressing and holding the main
unit’s TUNER PRESET + and TUNER PRESET – for at least 3 seconds.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
vSee overleaf
BD
118
SYSTEM SETUP
Language
Default settings are underlined.
Set the language for display on the menu screen.
Setting details
English / Deutsch / Français
“Language” can also be set by the following procedure. However, the menu screen is not displayed.
1. Press and hold the main unit’s PRESET 1 and PRESET 3 for at least 3 seconds.
zVideo Format” appears on the display.
2. Press the main unit’s STATUS and set “zGUI Language”.
3. Press the main unit’s TUNER PRESET CH +, – and set the language.
4. Press the main unit’s INTERNET RADIO V to complete the setting.
Notes concerning use of “Firmware Update” and “Add New Feature”
•In order to use these functions, you must have the correct system requirements and settings for a
broadband Internet connection (vpage19).
•Do not turn off the power until updating or upgrading is completed.
•Even with a broadband connection to the Internet, approximately 1 hour is required for the updating/
upgrading procedure to be completed.
•Once updating/upgrade starts, normal operations on this unit cannot be performed until updating/
upgrading is completed.
•Furthermore, updating/upgrading the firmware may reset the backup data for the parameters, etc. set
for this unit.
•If the update or upgrade fails, press and hold the ON/STANDBY on the main unit for more than 5
seconds, or remove and re-insert the power cord. “Update retry” appears on the display and update
restarts from the point at which update failed. If the error continues despite this, check the network
environment.
•Information regarding the “Firmware Update” function and “Add New Feature” will be announced on
the DENON web site each time related plans are defined.
•When usable new firmware is released with “Firmware Update” or “Add New Feature”, a notification
message is displayed on the menu screen. When you do not want to be notified, set “Update Notification”
(vpage113) and “Upgrade Notification” (vpage113) to “OFF”.
Setting items Setting details
Maintenance Mode
Use when receiving
maintenance from a DENON
service engineer or custom
installer.
NOTE
Only use this function if so instructed by a DENON serviceperson or
installer.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
BD
119
INFORMATION
Show information about receiver settings, input signals, etc.
Items Setting details
Status
Show information about
current settings.
n MAIN ZONE
This item shows information about settings for MAIN ZONE.
The information displayed differs according to the input source.
Select Source / Name / Surround Mode / Input Mode /
Decode Mode / Assign / Video Select / Video Mode /
Content Type etc.
n ZONE2/3
This item shows information about settings for ZONE2 or ZONE3.
Power / Select Source / Volume Level
Audio Input Signal
Show information about
audio input signals.
Surround Mode : The currently set surround mode.
Signal : The input signal type.
fs : The input signal’s sampling frequency.
Format : The number of channels in the input signal (front, surround, LFE).
Offset : The dialogue normalization correction value.
Flag : This is displayed when inputting signals including a surround back
channel. “MATRIX” is displayed with Dolby Digital EX and DTS-ES Matrix
signals, “DISCRETE” with DTS-ES Discrete signals.
Dialogue normalization function
This function is automatically activated when playing Dolby Digital
sources.
It automatically corrects the standard signal level for individual program
sources.
The correction value can be checked using the
STATUS on the main unit.
The figure is the corrected value. This cannot be changed.
HDMI Information
Show information about
HDMI input/output signals
and monitor.
Signal Information
•Resolution / Color Space / Pixel Depth
Monitor 1 / Monitor 2
•Interface / Supported Resolution
Items Setting details
Auto Surround Mode
Show information about
auto surround mode
settings.
Analog/PCM 2ch / Digital 2ch / Digital 5.1ch / Multi ch
Quick Select
Show information about
“Quick select function”
(vpage73) settings.
Quick Select 1 / Quick Select 2 / Quick Select 3 / Quick Select 4 /
ZONE2 Quick Select 1 / ZONE2 Quick Select 2 / ZONE2 Quick Select 3 /
ZONE2 Quick Select 4 / ZONE3 Quick Select 1 / ZONE3 Quick Select 2 /
ZONE3 Quick Select 3 / ZONE3 Quick Select 4
•Name / Volume Level / Select Source / Video Select /
MultEQ
®
XT / Dynamic EQ
®
/ Dynamic Volume
®
/
Auto Surround Mode Analog/PCM 2ch /
Auto Surround Mode Digital 2ch /
Auto Surround Mode Digital 5.1ch /
Auto Surround Mode Multi ch
Preset Channel
Show information about
preset channels.
TUNER
NET/USB
Preset 1 – 3
A1 – G8
“Preset 1 – 3” is displayed when the input source is “NET/USB”.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
BD
120
Operating the connected devices by remote control unit
Registering the supplied preset codes in the remote control unit
enables you to operate devices made by other manufacturers.
Operating AV devices
1
Press ZONE SELECT to select a
zone for operation.
The zone mode indicator corresponding
to the operating zone lights.
•The mode switches each time ZONE
SELECT
is pressed.
M
Select for the operations in MAIN
ZONE.
Z2
Select for the operations in ZONE2.
Z3
Select for the operations in ZONE3.
2
Press the input source select button (vpage 28).
•The input source for the zone selected in step 1 is switched.
•The operation mode of the remote control unit is switched as
shown in the table.
Input source
select button
Input
source of
this unit
Operation mode
Devices controllable with the
remote control unit
This unit (AMP-operation)
z2
z1
BD
Device registered on the
BD
button
z1
SAT/CBL
Device registered on the SAT/CBL
button
z1
TV
Device registered on the
TV
button
NET/USB Network function
z1
DVD
Device registered on the
DVD
button
z1
V.AUX
Device registered on the
V.AUX
button
DOCK Control dock for iPod
TUNER Radio of this unit
z1
GAME1
Device registered on the
GAME1
button
z1
GAME2
Device registered on the
GAME2
button
z1
DVR
Device registered on the
DVR
button
z1
CD
Device registered on the
CD
button
PHONO This unit (AMP-operation)
z2
z1 If a preset code is registered for this button, the remote control
unit of this unit can control another devices.
z2 This operation mode enables you to operate iPod, USB, Control
dock for iPod, Network function and TUNER.
When the SOURCE SELECT is pressed, the AMP-operation mode
starts automatically.
NOTE
If the mode of the remote control unit is set to other than AMP-
operation mode, press AMP to switch the remote control unit to the
AMP-operation mode to perform the following operations:
•For menu operation by pressing MENU
•For setting the channel level of the unit by pressing CH LEVEL
•For turning power in each zone on or off by pressing ZONE/DEVICE Z
or ZONE/DEVICE X.
3
Operate this unit or the device whose input source is
switched.
•For details, refer to the operating instructions for each device.
For operations of iPod, TUNER and USB memory device, see the
following pages.
•iPod (vpage32, 34)
•TUNER (vpage38)
•Network function (vpage43,44,46,48,50)
•USB memory device (vpage52)
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
121
Registering preset codes
When preset codes are registered in the included remote control unit,
it can then be used to operate any devices you have, such as DVD
players or TVs made by different manufacturers.
In this menu, you can search and display the preset codes that can be
preset in the included remote control unit.
nButtons used for operating the devices
q ZONE/DEVICE Z, ZONE/DEVICE X
For switching power of each device on or off.
w uio p, ENTER, RETURN B
For menu operation of each device.
e MENU, SETUP, TOP MENU
For displaying the menu of each device.
r 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 8, 9
t Number button (09, +10)
y CH +, CH –
u TV Z / X, TV INPUT
For operating a TV
This button is enabled in any mode.
For details on operation with the remote control unit, see pages
32,34,38,43,44,46,48,50,52,123.
nDefault settings for preset codes
The devices shown below are registered for each input source
button as default. Settings can be changed according to the
devices to be used.
Input source
select button
Category Brand Preset code
Blu-ray Disc player DENON 32258
Satellite set top box DirecTV 01377
Television SONY 10810
DVD player DENON 32134
Digital camcorder
(DVD recorder)
Panasonic 21378
z
Control dock for iPod DENON 72516
Cable set top box Motorola 01376
Cable set top box
Scientific
Atlanta
01877
DVD recorder Tivo 20739
CD player DENON 42867
z If a control dock for iPod is not to be used, the preset code for
another device can be set to
DOCK.
NOTE
The preset code cannot be registered to NET/USB, TUNER or PHONO.
1
Press ZONE SELECT to switch the zone mode to
J
(MAIN ZONE).
The J indicator lights.
2
Press AMP to set the remote control unit to AMP-
operation mode.
3
Press MENU.
The menu is displayed on the TV screen.
4
Use ui to select “SYSTEM SETUP” – “Option
Setup” – “Remote Setup Guide” and then press
ENTER or p.
OPTION SETUP
Volume Control
Source Delete
GUI
Remote Setup Guide
Quick Select Name
Zone Rename
Search preset codes to register in the remote
controller
5
Pressing ui, select the device
category for preset registration.
Then press ENTER.
CABLE
Blu-ray
PVR
CABLE/PVR SAT
CD SAT/PVR
CD Recorder TV
DVD TV/DVD
DVD Recorder TV/VCR
HD DVD VCR
REMOTE SETUP GUIDE
IPTV STB
Please select the device you want to control.
Enter
RETURN
ReturnSelect
•For “TV”, “TV/DVD” or “TV/VCR” categories, only the preset
code for TV can be registered.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
vSee overleaf
122
6
Pressing ui, select the rst letter of the device
brand name. Then press ENTER.
A
B
C
Device : DVD
D
E
F
G
H
I
REMOTE SETUP GUIDE
1
Please select the first letter of
the brand name of the device.
Enter
RETURN
Return
Select
•The first character is displayed as 1, A to Z.
(Initials for the brand are displayed for each
category.)
For brand names that start with numbers
and symbols, select “1”.
7
Pressing ui, select the device
brand name. Then press ENTER.
Denon
Dantax
Disney
DSE
Durabrand
REMOTE SETUP GUIDE
Please select brand name.
-DVD-
Enter
RETURN
Return
Select
•When there are several pages of brand
names, the pages can be switched by
pressing the remote control unit’s CH + or
CH –.
NOTE
If the desired brand name is not listed, the supplied remote control
unit cannot control the device. Use the remote control unit supplied
with the device to be used.
Registering preset codes
8
The procedures for registering remote control codes
and remote control preset registration are displayed.
1.Press [INPUT SOURCE].
2.Press and hold [DEVICE ON ( l )] for 3 seconds.
3.Input code with [0-9].
4.Press any key to check device. (e.g. [DEVICE ON ( l )])
REMOTE SETUP GUIDE
Device
Brand
Code [1/3]
: DVD
: DENON
: 30490
Press QUICK 1 if device works, QUICK 2 if not
QUICK3
Return
QUICK2
NG
QUICK1
OK
NOTE
If a wrong brand name is selected, press QUICK SELECT 3. The
following screen is displayed:
1.Press [INPUT SOURCE].
2.Press and hold [DEVICE ON ( l )] for 3 seconds.
3.Input code with [0-9].
4.Press any key to check device. (e.g. [DEVICE ON ( l )])
REMOTE SETUP GUIDE
Device
Brand
Code [1/3]
: DVD
: DENON
: 30490
Press QUICK 1 if device works, QUICK 2 if not
QUICK3
Return
QUICK2
NG
QUICK1
OK
OK
Press [AMP] button.
And press [ENTER] button to return
Brand select menu.
Press AMP then ENTER to return to step 7.
9
Press the input source button on which the preset
code is to be registered (BD, SAT/CBL, TV, DVD,
V.AUX, DOCK, GAME1, GAME2, DVR or CD).
•For TV, only the preset code for the categories “TV”, “TV/DVD”, or
“TV/VCR” can be registered.
10
Press and hold ZONE/DEVICE Z for at least 3 seconds.
The zone mode indicator flashes twice.
11
Enter a ve-digit code using 0 – 9.
Press the buttons with an interval less than 10 seconds.
1.Press [INPUT SOURCE].
2.Press and hold [DEVICE ON ( l )] for 3 seconds.
3.Input code with [0-9].
4.Press any key to check device. (e.g. [DEVICE ON ( l )])
REMOTE SETUP GUIDE
Device
Brand
Code [1/3]
: DVD
: DENON
: 30490
Press QUICK 1 if device works, QUICK 2 if not
QUICK3
Return
QUICK2
NG
QUICK1
OK
•When the code is registered.
The zone mode indicator flashes twice.
•When the code is not registered correctly
The mode indicator slowly flashes once. Perform from step 9
again.
•When an input number is not correct
Press ON once then perform the operations from step 9 again.
12
Operate the device being used to check the operation.
•If the device is operating, press QUICK SELECT 1.
Go to step 13.
•If the device is not operating, press QUICK SELECT 2.
Go to step 14.
13
The screen shown below is displayed, and registration
of the preset code is completed.
1.Press [INPUT SOURCE].
2.Press and hold [DEVICE ON ( l )] for 3 seconds.
3.Input code with [0-9].
4.Press any key to check device. (e.g. [DEVICE ON ( l )])
REMOTE SETUP GUIDE
Device
Brand
Code [1/3]
: DVD
: DENON
: 30490
Press QUICK 1 if device works, QUICK 2 if not
QUICK3
Return
QUICK2
NG
QUICK1
OK
OK
Remote Setup Guide is finished.
Press [AMP] button.
And press [ENTER] button to return
MENU.
•The menu screen is retrieved. Press AMP then ENTER.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
vSee overleaf
123
Registering preset codes
14
Either of the screens below is displayed.
q
1.Press [INPUT SOURCE] button.
2.Press and hold 3 seconds [DEVICE ON(1)] button.
3.Input code with [0-9] button.
4.Press any key to check device.(e.g.[DEVICE ON(1)])
REMOTE SETUP GUIDE
Device
Brand
Code [1/3]
: DVD
: DENON
: 30490
Press QUICK 1 if device works, QUICK 2 if not
QUICK3
Return
QUICK2
NG
QUICK1
OK
Selected code is not matched.
Please try other codes.
•The screen is displayed for 3 seconds, then the next preset
registration screen is displayed automatically.
w
1.Press [INPUT SOURCE] button.
2.Press and hold 3 seconds [DEVICE ON(1)] button.
3.Input code with [0-9] button.
4.Press any key to check device.(e.g.[DEVICE ON(1)])
REMOTE SETUP GUIDE
Device
Brand
Code [1/3]
: DVD
: DENON
: 30490
Press QUICK 1 if device works, QUICK 2 if not
QUICK3
Return
QUICK2
NG
QUICK1
OK
OK
Sorry, your remote is not supported.
This function can not be used for
your device.
Press [AMP] button.
And press [ENTER] button to return
MENU.
GIf screen q is displayedH
The device may be operating with the preset code displayed next.
The preset registration screen is displayed. Repeat steps 9 to 12.
GIf screen w is displayedH
The device cannot be controlled with the remote control unit supplied
with this unit. Use the remote control unit supplied with the device
to be used. The menu screen is retrieved. Press AMP then ENTER.
Some manufacturers use more than one type of remote control code.
Preset codes to change the number and verify correct operation.
NOTE
Depending on the model and year of manufacture of your device,
some buttons may not operate.
Operating devices
The supplied remote control unit can control a device other than this
unit.
1
Press the input source select
button to which the preset
code for the device you want
to operate has been registered
(vpage 120).
2
Operate the device.
•For details, refer to the device’s operating
instructions.
nBlu-ray Disc player / HD-DVD player /
DVD player operation
Operation buttons Function
CH +, – Switch channels (up/down)
MENU (Popup) Menu
TOP MENU Top menu
uio p
Cursor operation
ENTER Enter
SETUP Setup
RETURN B
Return
6 7
Manual search
(fast-reverse/fast-forward)
1
Playback
8 9
Auto search (cue)
3
Pause
2
Stop
0 – 9, +10
Select title, chapter or channel
selection
TV Z / X
TV power on/standby (Default : SONY)
TV INPUT Switch TV input (Default : SONY)
ZONE/DEVICE Z Power onz
ZONE/DEVICE X Power standbyz
z This may power some devices on/standby.
nCD player / CD recorder operation
Operation buttons Function
uio p
Cursor operation
ENTER Enter
6 7
Manual search
(fast-reverse/fast-forward)
1
Playback
8 9
Auto search (cue)
3
Pause
2
Stop
0 – 9, +10 Track selection
TV Z / X
TV power on/standby (Default : SONY)
TV INPUT Switch TV input (Default : SONY)
ZONE/DEVICE Z Power onz
ZONE/DEVICE X Power standbyz
z This may power some devices on/standby.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
vSee overleaf
124
nDVD recorder (DVR) / Personal video recorder
(PVR) / video cassette recorder (VCR) operation
Operation buttons Function
CH +, – Switch channels (up/down)
MENU Menu
uio p
Cursor operation
ENTER Enter
SETUP Setup
RETURN B
Return
6 7
Manual search
(fast-reverse/fast-forward)
1
Playback
8 9
Auto search (cue)
3
Pause
2
Stop
0 – 9, +10
Select title, chapter or channel
selection
TV Z / X
TV power on/standby (Default : SONY)
TV INPUT Switch TV input (Default : SONY)
ZONE/DEVICE Z Power onz
ZONE/DEVICE X Power standbyz
z This may power some devices on/standby.
nTV operation
Operation buttons Function
CH +, – Switch channels (up/down)
MENU Menu
uio p
Cursor operation
ENTER Enter
SETUP Setup
RETURN B
Return
6 7
Manual search
(fast-reverse/fast-forward)
1
Playback
8 9
Auto search (cue)
3
Pause
2
Stop
0 – 9, +10 Channel selection
TV Z / X
TV power on/standby (Default : SONY)
TV INPUT Switch TV input (Default : SONY)
ZONE/DEVICE Z Power onz
ZONE/DEVICE X Power standbyz
z This may power some devices on/standby.
nSet top box for satellite (SAT) / cable (CBL) /
IP TV operation
Operation buttons Function
CH +, – Switch channels (up/down)
MENU Menu
uio p
Cursor operation
ENTER Enter
SETUP Guide
RETURN B
Return
6 7
Manual search
(fast-reverse/fast-forward)
1
Playback
8 9
Auto search (cue)
3
Pause
2
Stop
0 – 9, +10 Channel selection
TV Z / X
TV power on/standby (Default : SONY)
TV INPUT Switch TV input (Default : SONY)
ZONE/DEVICE Z Power onz
ZONE/DEVICE X Power standbyz
z This may power some devices on/standby.
Operating devices
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
125
Specifying the zone used with the
main remote control unit
When the ZONE SELECT button is pressed, only the set zone can be
operated with the remote control unit.
1
Press and hold ZONE/DEVICE Z
for at least 3 seconds.
The zone mode indicator flashes twice.
2
Press ZONE SELECT.
The zone mode indicator flashes twice.
3
Press 1 – 3 to set.
The zone mode indicator flashes twice.
[Settable items]
1 When only using “MAIN ZONE”
2 When using “MAIN ZONE” /
“ZONE2”
3 When using “MAIN ZONE” /
“ZONE2” / “ZONE3” (Default)
Resetting the remote control unit
Settings for the remote control unit are returned to the default values.
1
Press and hold ZONE/DEVICE Z
for at least 3 seconds.
The zone mode indicator flashes twice.
2
Press 9, 8 and 1, in that order.
J indicator flashes four times.
All the settings are restored to their
defaults.
Basic version
Advanced version
Information
Advanced version
Information
126
F Part names and functions vpage127
F Other information vpage132
F Troubleshooting vpage144
F Specifications vpage149
F Index vpage150
Information
Here, we list various information related to this unit.
Please refer to this information as needed.
Basic version
Advanced version
InformationInformation
127
Front panel
For buttons not explained here, see the page indicated in parentheses ( ).
W1Q6 Q7 Q8 Q9 W0 W2 W3
Q5
Q3Q4
Q2 Q1
o Q0
i
utr yewq
q Power operation button
(ON/STANDBY) ································································· (C 5)
Turns power to this unit on and off (standby).
w Power indicator ································································· (C 5)
e Headphones jack (PHONES)
When the headphones are plugged into this jack, audio will no
longer be output from the connected speakers or from the PRE
OUT connectors.
NOTE
To prevent hearing loss, do not raise the volume level excessively
when using headphones.
r QUICK SELECT buttons ···················································· (73, 83)
t INTERNET RADIO button (V) ··············································· (41)
y PRESET CHANNEL buttons (1 – 3) ········································· (42)
Q4 Remote control sensor ························································· (131)
Q5 SOURCE SELECT knob ····················································· (28, 82)
Q6 DIMMER button ····································································· (116)
Q7 ZONE2 ON/OFF button ··························································· (82)
Q8 ZONE3 ON/OFF button ··························································· (82)
Q9 ZONE2 / REC SELECT button ··········································· (74, 82)
W0 ZONE3 SELECT button ··················································· (82, 120)
W1 iPod play button (iPod 1) ······················································· (34)
W2 Tuner preset channel buttons
(TUNER PRESET CH +, –) ························································ (36)
W3 STATUS button ····································································· (119)
u USB/iPod port ········································································· (15)
i HDMI connector ········································································· (8)
o V.AUX INPUT connectors ······················································· (14)
Remove the cap covering the connectors when you want to use
them.
Q0 SETUP MIC jack ································································· (23, 67)
Q1 MASTER VOLUME control knob ············································ (29)
Q2 Master volume indicator
Q3 Display ···················································································· (128)
Part names and functions
Basic version
Advanced version
InformationInformation
128
Display
uioQ5
Q7
Q9 Q0Q1Q3Q4
Q2
Q6
Q8
wq e r t
y
q Input signal indicators
w Input signal channel indicators
These light when digital signals are input.
When playing HD Audio sources, the indicator lights when a
signal from an extension channel (a channel other than the front,
center, surround, surround back or LFE channel) is input.
If there are two or more extension channels, the and
indicators light.
e Information display
The input source name, surround mode, setting values and other
information are displayed here.
r Output signal channel indicators
Lights when audio signals are being output from the speakers.
t Front speaker indicator
This lights according to the setting of the front A and B speakers.
y Monitor output indicator
These light according to the HDMI monitor output setting.
When set to “Auto (Dual)”, the indicators light according to
connection status.
u Master volume indicator
i MUTE indicator
This lights when the mute mode is selected (vpage29).
o PARTY indicators
These light during party mode (vpage 76 “Party mode
function”).
•ORGANIZER
This lights to indicate that party mode has started as Organizer.
•ATTENDEE
This lights to indicate that party mode has started as Attendee.
Q0 Audyssey
®
indicators
Lights up as follows, depending on the setting of “MultEQ
®
XT”,
(vpage 100), “Dynamic EQ
®
” (vpage 100) and “Dynamic
Volume
®
” (vpage100).
When “MultEQ
®
XT”, “Dynamic EQ
®
” and
“Dynamic Volume
®
” are “ON”.
When “MultEQ
®
XT” and “Dynamic EQ
®
” are
“ON” and “Dynamic Volume
®
” is “OFF”.
When “MultEQ
®
XT” is “ON” and “Dynamic EQ
®
and “Dynamic Volume
®
” are “OFF”.
Q1 Sleep timer indicator
This lights when the sleep mode is selected (vpage71, 83).
Q2 RESTORER indicator
This lights when the RESTORER mode is selected (vpage102).
Q3 Multi-zone indicators
This lights up when ZONE2, ZONE3 (separate room) power is
turned on (vpage82).
Q4 AL24 indicator
This lights when AL24 Processing Plus (vpage141) is activated.
Q5 Input mode indicators
Set the audio input modes for the different input sources
(vpage93).
Q6 HDMI indicator
This lights when playing using HDMI connections.
Q7 Tuner reception mode indicators
These light according to the reception conditions when the input
source is set to “TUNER”.
STEREO : In the FM mode, this lights up when receiving stereo
broadcasts.
TUNED : Lights up when the broadcast is properly tuned in.
AUTO : Lights up when in the auto tuning mode.
RDS : Lights up when receiving RDS broadcasts.
Q8 Recording output source indicator
This lights when the REC OUT mode is selected.
Q9 Decoder indicators
These light when the respective decoders are operating.
Basic version
Advanced version
InformationInformation
129
Rear panel
See the page indicated in parentheses ( ).
o
q w
e tr y u
Q0 i
Q5 Q4 Q2Q3 Q1
q RS-232C connector ·································································· (20)
w FM/AM antenna terminals ····················································· (16)
e Analog audio connectors ································ (11, 12, 13, 17, 18)
r SIGNAL GND terminal ···························································· (17)
t PRE OUT connectors ··························· (C 6, 61, 62, 64, 65, 66)
y Speaker terminals ······························· (C 6, 61, 62, 64, 65, 66)
u AC inlet (AC IN) ·································································· (C 5)
i COMPONENT VIDEO connectors ······························· (10, 11, 12)
o HDMI connectors ··························································· (C 3, 8)
Q0 Digital audio connectors ······································· (10, 11, 12, 13)
Q1 ETHERNET connector ····························································· (19)
Q2 REMOTE CONTROL jacks ······················································· (20)
Q3 DOCK CONTROL jack ······························································ (14)
Q4 S-VIDEO/VIDEO connectors ··························· (10, 11, 12, 13, 14)
Q5 TRIGGER OUT jacks ································································ (20)
NOTE
Do not touch the inner pins of the connectors on the rear panel.
Electrostatic discharge may cause permanent damage to the unit.
Basic version
Advanced version
InformationInformation
130
Remote control unit
For buttons not explained here, see the page indicated in parentheses ( ).
q
w
e
r
t
y
u
i
o
Q0
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q8
Q7
W9
W8
W7
W6
W2
W1
W0
Q9
W3
W4
W5
q ZONE SELECT button ························ (82, 120)
w Zone mode indicators ······························ (120)
e Input source select buttons ················· (28, 82)
r QUICK SELECT buttons ······················· (73, 83)
t INTERNET RADIO button (V) ·················· (41)
y Preset channel buttons
(PRESET 1 – 3) ············································· (42)
u AMP button ··············································· (120)
i Channel buttons
(CH +, –) ································· (35, 42, 123, 124)
o Muting button (N) ······························ (29, 82)
Q0 MENU button ·············································· (89)
Q1 Cursor buttons
(uio p) ······························ (85, 86, 87, 88, 89)
Q2 SEARCH button
································· (31, 33, 36, 39, 49, 51, 88)
Q3 System buttons
··········· (32,34,43,44,46,48,50,52,123,124)
•Search buttons (6, 7)
•Skip buttons (8, 9)
•Play button (1)
•Pause button (3)
•Stop button (2)
Tuner system buttons ································(38)
•FM/AM band switching button (BAND)
•Tuning mode button (MODE)
•Tuning up / Tuning down buttons
(TUNING df)
Q4 Character buttons ······································ (88)
Q5 MEMORY button ···························· (35, 42, 43)
Q6 Number buttons
················· (35,36,42,121,122,123,124,125)
Q7 SHIFT button ··································· (35, 42, 87)
Q8 TV operation buttons
(TV Z / X / INPUT) ···························· (123, 124)
Q9 Remote control signal transmitter ········· (131)
W0 Power buttons
(ON / STANDBY) ·································· (C 5)
W1 SOURCE SELECT button ··························· (29)
W2 Master volume control buttons
(M df) ················································· (29, 82)
W3 Channel level button (CH LEVEL) ············· (72)
W4 RETURN button (B) ································· (89)
W5 ENTER button ····················· (85, 86, 87, 88, 89)
W6 Surround mode buttons ···························· (53)
•MOVIE button
•MUSIC button
•GAME button
•DIRECT button
W7 SLEEP button ········································ (71, 83)
W8 PARTY button ············································· (76)
W9 ZONE/DEVICE power buttons
····················································· (82, 123, 124)
Basic version
Advanced version
InformationInformation
vSee overleaf
131
Remote control unit
Inserting the batteries
q Slide the rear lid in the
direction of the arrow and
remove it.
w Load the two batteries properly
as indicated by the marks in
the battery compartment.
R6/AA
e Put the rear cover back on.
NOTE
•Insert the specified batteries in the remote control unit.
•Replace the batteries with new ones if the set does not operate
even when the remote control unit is operated close to the unit. (The
supplied batteries are only for verifying operation.)
•When inserting the batteries, be sure to do so in the proper direction,
following the q and w marks in the battery compartment.
•To prevent damage or leakage of battery fluid:
•Do not use a new battery together with an old one.
•Do not use two different types of batteries.
•Do not attempt to charge dry batteries.
•Do not short-circuit, disassemble, heat or dispose of batteries in
flames.
•Do not keep the battery in a place exposed to direct sunlight or in
places with extremely high temperatures, such as near a heater.
•If the battery fluid should leak, carefully wipe the fluid off the inside
of the battery compartment and insert new batteries.
•Remove the batteries from the remote control unit if it will not be in
use for long periods.
•Used batteries should be disposed of in accordance with the local
regulations regarding battery disposal.
•The remote control unit may function improperly if rechargeable
batteries are used.
Operating range of the remote control unit
Point the remote control unit at the remote sensor when operating it.
30°30°
Approx. 7 m
NOTE
•The set may function improperly or the remote control unit may not
operate if the remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight,
strong artificial light from an inverter type fluorescent lamp or
infrared light.
•When using 3D video devices that transmit radio communication
signals (such as infrared signals etc) between the various units (such
as the monitor, 3D glasses, 3D transmitter unit etc), the remote
control unit may not operate due to interference from those radio
communication signals. If this occurs, adjust the direction and
distance of the 3D communication for each unit, and check that the
remote control unit operation is not affected by these signals.
Basic version
Advanced version
InformationInformation
132
Other information
n Trademark information (vpage132)
n Surround (vpage133)
n Relationship between video signals and monitor
output (vpage139)
n Explanation of terms (vpage141)
Trademark information
This product uses the following technologies:
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”,
“Pro Logic” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942;
5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872;
7,333,929; 7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide
patents issued & pending. DTS and the Symbol are registered
trademarks, & DTS-HD, DTS-HD Master Audio, and the DTS logos
are trademarks of DTS, Inc. Product includes software. © DTS, Inc.
All Rights Reserved.
HDMI, the HDMI Logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the
United States and other countries.
Manufactured under license from Audyssey Laboratories™. U.S.
and foreign patents pending. Audyssey MultEQ
®
XT is a registered
trademark of Audyssey Laboratories. Audyssey Dynamic EQ
®
is a
registered trademark of Audyssey Laboratories. Audyssey Dynamic
Volume
®
is a registered trademark of Audyssey Laboratories.
Audyssey DSX™ is a trademark of Audyssey Laboratories.
“Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic
accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod, or
iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to
meet Apple performance standards.
Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its
compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that
the use of this accessory with iPod, or iPhone, may affect wireless
performance.
AirPlay, the AirPlay logo, iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, iPod
shuffle, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries. iPad is a trademark of Apple Inc.
•Individual users are permitted to use iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod
nano, iPod shuffle, and iPod touch for private copy and playback of
non-copyrighted contents and contents whose copy and playback
is permitted by law. Copyright infringement is prohibited by law.
Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or
other countries.
This item incorporates copy protection technology that is protected
by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights of Rovi
Corporation. Reverse engineering and disassembly are prohibited.
Basic version
Advanced version
InformationInformation
133
Surround
This unit is equipped with a digital signal processing circuit that lets you play program sources in the surround mode to achieve the same sense of presence as in a movie theater.
Surround modes and surround parameters
This table shows the speakers that can be used in each surround mode and the surround parameters adjustable in each surround mode.
Symbols in the table
S This indicates the audio output channels or surround parameters that can be set.
D This indicates the audio output channels. The output channels depend on the settings of “Speaker Config.” (vpage104).
Surround mode (vpage53)
Channel output
Surround Parameters (vpage97) z1 During playback in PURE DIRECT mode, the surround parameters
are the same as in DIRECT mode.
z2 This item can be selected when a Dolby TrueHD signal is played.
z3 Only when “Subwoofer Mode” is set to “LFE+Main”
(vpage105), sound is output from the subwoofer.
z4 A signal for each channel contained in an input signal is output as
audio.
z5 If “Surround Parameters” – “PLgz Height” (vpage 98) is set
to “ON”, sound is output from the front height speakers.
z6 This item cannot be set when “Surround Parameters” – “Surround
Back” (vpage98) is set to “PLgx Music”.
z7 If this surround mode is selected, only the “Height” mode setting
is available for “Surround Parameters” – “Mode” (vpage97).
z8 This item can be selected when “Surround Parameters” – “Mode”
(vpage97 is set to “Cinema”.
z9 This item can be selected when “Surround Parameters” – “Mode”
(vpage97) is set to “Cinema” or “Pro Logic”.
z10 If “Audyssey DSX™” (vpage 101) is set to “ON–Height–”,
sound is output from the front height speakers.
z11 If “Audyssey DSX™” (vpage 101) is set to “ON–Wide–”,
sound is output from the front wide speakers.
z12 If “Surround Parameters” – “Speaker” (vpage 99) is set
to “Surround Back”, sound is output from the surround back
speakers.
z13 If “Surround Parameters” – “Speaker” (vpage 99) is set to
“Height”, sound is output from the front height speakers.
z14 If “Surround Parameters” – “Speaker” (vpage 99) is set to
“Wide”, sound is output from the front wide speakers.
Front
L/R
Center
Surround
L/R
Surround back
L/R
Front height
L/R
Front wide
L/R
Subwoofer
Mode
(vpage97)
Cinema EQ.
(vpage97)
DRC
z2
(vpage97)
DIRECT/PURE DIRECT (2channel)
z1
S D
z3
S
DIRECT/PURE DIRECT (Multi-channel)
z1
S D D D
z4
D
z4
D
z4
D S
STEREO
S D S
MULTI CH IN
S D D D D
z5
D S
z6
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gz S D D D D S
z7
S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx S D D D D S S
z8
S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g S D D D S S
z9
S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC
S D D D S S
z9
S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g A-DSX S D D D
z10
D
z11
D S S
z9
S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC A-DSX
S D D D
z10
D
z11
D S S
z9
S
DTS NEO:6
S D D D D S S
z8
S
DTS NEO:6 A-DSX
S D D D
z10
D
z11
D S S
z8
S
Audyssey DSX™
S D D D
z10
D
z11
D S S
DOLBY DIGITAL
S D D D D
z5
D S
z6
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus
S D D D D
z5
D S
z6
DOLBY TrueHD
S D D D D
z5
D S
z6
S
DTS SURROUND
S D D D D
z5
D S
z6
DTS 96/24
S D D D D
z5
D S
z6
DTS-HD
S D D D D
z5
D S
z6
DTS Express
S D D D D
z5
D S
z6
MULTI CH STEREO
S D D D
z12
D
z13
D
z14
D S
ROCK ARENA
S D D D
z12
D
z13
D
z14
D S
JAZZ CLUB
S D D D
z12
D
z13
D
z14
D S
MONO MOVIE
S D D D
z12
D
z13
D
z14
D S
VIDEO GAME
S D D D
z12
D
z13
D
z14
D S
MATRIX
S D D D
z12
D
z13
D
z14
D S
VIRTUAL
S D S
Basic version
Advanced version
InformationInformation
134
Surround
Surround mode (vpage53)
Surround Parameters (vpage97) z1 During playback in PURE DIRECT mode, the
surround parameters are the same as in DIRECT
mode.
z3 Only when “Subwoofer Mode” is set to
“LFE+Main” (vpage105), sound is output from
the subwoofer.
z15 This item can be selected when a Dolby Digital or
DTS signal is played.
z16 This item can be selected when a Dolby Digital or
DTS signal or DVD-Audio is played.
z17 This item can be selected when “Surround
Parameters” – “PLgz Height” (vpage 98) is
set to “ON”.
z18 If “Speaker Config.” – “Front Height”
(vpage 105) is set to “None”, this item cannot
be selected.
D. COMP
z15
(vpage97)
LFE
z16
(vpage97)
Delay Time
(vpage97)
Effect Level
(vpage97)
Room Size
(vpage97)
Height Gain
z17
(vpage98)
PLgz Height
z18
(vpage98)
AFDM
z16
(vpage98)
Surround Back
(vpage98)
Speaker
(vpage99)
Subwoofer
(vpage99)
DIRECT/PURE DIRECT (2channel)
z1
S S
z3
DIRECT/PURE DIRECT (Multi-channel)
z1
S S
STEREO
S S
MULTI CH IN
S S S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gz S S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g S S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC
S S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g A-DSX S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC A-DSX
S
DTS NEO:6
S S
DTS NEO:6 A-DSX
S
Audyssey DSX™
S S S
DOLBY DIGITAL
S S S S S S
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus
S S S S S S
DOLBY TrueHD
S S S S S
DTS SURROUND
S S S S S S
DTS 96/24
S S S S S S
DTS-HD
S S S S S S
DTS Express
S S S S S
MULTI CH STEREO
S S S
ROCK ARENA
S S S S S
JAZZ CLUB
S S S S S
MONO MOVIE
S S S S S
VIDEO GAME
S S S S S
MATRIX
S S S S S
VIRTUAL
S S
Basic version
Advanced version
InformationInformation
135
Surround
Surround mode (vpage53)
Surround Parameters (vpage97)
Tone
z19
(vpage99)
Audyssey Settings
z20
(vpage100)
Audyssey
DSX™
z20
(vpage101)
RESTORER
z23
(vpage102)
z1 During playback in PURE DIRECT mode, the surround parameters
are the same as in DIRECT mode.
z19 This item cannot be set when “Dynamic EQ
®
” (vpage100) is
set to “ON”.
z20 For HD Audio whose sampling frequency of an input signal is more
than 96 kHz, this sound parameter cannot be set.
z21 This item cannot be set when “MultEQ
®
XT” (vpage 100) is
set to “OFF” or “Manual”.
z22 This item cannot be set when “Dynamic EQ
®
” (vpage100) is
set to “OFF”.
z23 This item can be set when the input signal is analog, PCM 48 kHz
or 44.1 kHz.
z24 In this surround mode, bass is +6 dB, and treble is +4 dB. (Default)
PRO LOGIC g/gx Music mode only
NEO:6 Music
mode only
Panorama
(vpage97)
Dimension
(vpage97)
Center Width
(vpage97)
Center Image
(vpage97)
MultEQ
®
XT
(vpage100)
Dynamic EQ
®
z21
(vpage100)
Dynamic
Volume
®
z22
(vpage100)
DIRECT/PURE DIRECT (2channel)
z1
DIRECT/PURE DIRECT (Multi-channel)
z1
STEREO
S S S S S
MULTI CH IN
S S S S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gz S S S S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx S S S S S S S S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g S S S S S S S S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC
S S S S S S S S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g A-DSX S S S S S S S S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC A-DSX
S S S S S S S S S
DTS NEO:6
S S S S S S S
DTS NEO:6 A-DSX
S S S S S S S
Audyssey DSX™
S S S S S
DOLBY DIGITAL
S S S S S
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus
S S S S S
DOLBY TrueHD
S S S S S
DTS SURROUND
S S S S S
DTS 96/24
S S S S S
DTS-HD
S S S S S
DTS Express
S S S S S
MULTI CH STEREO
S S S S S
ROCK ARENA
S
z24
S S S S
JAZZ CLUB
S S S S S
MONO MOVIE
S S S S S
VIDEO GAME
S S S S S
MATRIX
S S S S S
VIRTUAL
S S S S S
Basic version
Advanced version
InformationInformation
136
Surround
nTypes of input signals, and corresponding surround modes
This table shows the input signal that can be played in each surround mode. Check the audio signal of the input source then select the surround mode.
Symbols in the table
F This indicates the default surround mode.
D This indicates the surround mode that is fixed when “AFDM” (vpage98) is set to “ON”.
S This indicates the selectable surround mode.
Surround mode (vpage53)
NOTE
Input signal types and formats
ANALOG
PCM DTS-HD DTS DOLBY DOLBY DIGITAL
PCM
(multi ch)
PCM
(2ch)
DTS-HD
Master Audio
DTS-HD High
Resolution
Audio
DTS
EXPRESS
DTS ES
DSCRT
(With Flag)
DTS ES
MTRX
(With Flag)
DTS
(5.1ch)
DTS 96/24
DOLBY
TrueHD
DOLBY
DIGITAL Plus
DOLBY
DIGITAL EX
(With Flag)
DOLBY
DIGITAL EX
(With no
Flag)
DOLBY
DIGITAL
(5.1/5/4/3ch)
DOLBY
DIGITAL (2ch)
DTS SURROUND
DTS-HD MSTR
z1 F
DTS-HD HI RES
z1 F
DTS ES DSCRT6.1
z2z3 F
DTS ES MTRX6.1
z2z3 F D
DTS SURROUND
z1 S S F
DTS 96/24
z1 F
DTS (–HD) + PLgx CINEMA z2z4 S S S S S S
DTS (–HD) + PLgx MUSIC z2z3 S S S S S S
DTS (–HD) + PLgz z2z5 S S S S S S S
DTS EXPRESS
z1 F
DTS (–HD) + NEO:6
z2z3 S S S S S S
DTS NEO:6 CINEMA
z1 S S S
DTS NEO:6 MUSIC
z1 S S S
DTS NEO:6 CINEMA A-DSX
S S S
DTS NEO:6 MUSIC A-DSX
S S S
Audyssey DSX™
S S S S S S S
z1 The same was when “Audyssey DSX™” (vpage101) setting is set to “ON”.
z2 This surround mode can be selected when “Amp Assign” (vpage104) is set to “NORMAL”.
z3 If “Speaker Config.” – “Surr.Back” (vpage105) is set to “None”, this surround mode cannot be selected.
z4 If “Speaker Config.” – “Surr.Back” (vpage105) is set to “1spkr” or “None”, this surround mode cannot be selected.
z5 If “Speaker Config.” – “Front Height” (vpage105) is set to “None”, this surround mode cannot be selected.
Basic version
Advanced version
InformationInformation
137
Surround
Surround mode (vpage53)
NOTE
Input signal types and formats
ANALOG
PCM DTS-HD DTS DOLBY DOLBY DIGITAL
PCM
(multi ch)
PCM
(2ch)
DTS-HD
Master Audio
DTS-HD High
Resolution
Audio
DTS
EXPRESS
DTS ES
DSCRT
(With Flag)
DTS ES
MTRX
(With Flag)
DTS
(5.1ch)
DTS 96/24
DOLBY
TrueHD
DOLBY
DIGITAL Plus
DOLBY
DIGITAL EX
(With Flag)
DOLBY
DIGITAL EX
(With no
Flag)
DOLBY
DIGITAL
(5.1/5/4/3ch)
DOLBY
DIGITAL (2ch)
DOLBY SURROUND
DOLBY TrueHD
z1 F
DOLBY DIGITAL+
z1 F
DOLBY DIGITAL EX
z2z3 S S S
DOLBY (D+) (HD) +EX
z2z3 S S
DOLBY DIGITAL
z1 S F F
DOLBY (D) (D+) (HD) +PLgx CINEMA z2z4 S S F D S S
DOLBY (D) (D+) (HD) +PLgx MUSIC z2z3 S S S S S
DOLBY (D) (D+) (HD) +PLgz z5 S S S S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx CINEMA z2z3 S S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx MUSIC z2z3 S S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx GAME z2z3 S S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gz z2z5 S S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g CINEMA z1 S S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g MUSIC z1 S S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g GAME z1 S S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC
z1 S S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g CINEMA A-DSX S S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g MUSIC A-DSX S S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g GAME A-DSX S S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC A-DSX
S S S
Audyssey DSX™
S S S S S
z1 The same was when “Audyssey DSX™” (vpage101) setting is set to “ON”.
z2 This surround mode can be selected when “Amp Assign” (vpage104) is set to “NORMAL”.
z3 If “Speaker Config.” – “Surr.Back” (vpage105) is set to “None”, this surround mode cannot be selected.
z4 If “Speaker Config.” – “Surr.Back” (vpage105) is set to “1spkr” or “None”, this surround mode cannot be selected.
z5 If “Speaker Config.” – “Front Height” (vpage105) is set to “None”, this surround mode cannot be selected.
Basic version
Advanced version
InformationInformation
138
Surround
Surround mode (vpage53)
NOTE
Input signal types and formats
ANALOG
PCM DTS-HD DTS DOLBY DOLBY DIGITAL
PCM
(multi ch)
PCM
(2ch)
DTS-HD
Master Audio
DTS-HD High
Resolution
Audio
DTS
EXPRESS
DTS ES
DSCRT
(With Flag)
DTS ES
MTRX
(With Flag)
DTS
(5.1ch)
DTS 96/24
DOLBY
TrueHD
DOLBY
DIGITAL Plus
DOLBY
DIGITAL EX
(With Flag)
DOLBY
DIGITAL EX
(With no
Flag)
DOLBY
DIGITAL
(5.1/5/4/3ch)
DOLBY
DIGITAL (2ch)
MULTI CH IN
MULTI CH IN
z1 F
MULTI CH IN + PLgx CINEMA z2z4 S
MULTI CH IN + PLgx MUSIC z2z3 S
MULTI CH IN + PLgz z2z5 S
MULTI CH IN + Dolby EX
z2z3 S
MULTI CH IN 7.1
z2z3 F (7.1)
Audyssey DSX™
S
DIRECT
DIRECT
S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
PURE DIRECT
PURE DIRECT
S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
DSP SIMULATION
MULTI CH STEREO
S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
ROCK ARENA
S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
JAZZ CLUB
S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
MONO MOVIE
S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
VIDEO GAME
S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
MATRIX
S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
VIRTUAL
S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
STEREO
STEREO
F S F S S S S S S S S S S S S S
z1 The same was when “Audyssey DSX™” (vpage101) setting is set to “ON”.
z2 This surround mode can be selected when “Amp Assign” (vpage104) is set to “NORMAL”.
z3 If “Speaker Config.” – “Surr.Back” (vpage105) is set to “None”, this surround mode cannot be selected.
z4 If “Speaker Config.” – “Surr.Back” (vpage105) is set to “1spkr” or “None”, this surround mode cannot be selected.
z5 If “Speaker Config.” – “Front Height” (vpage105) is set to “None”, this surround mode cannot be selected.
Basic version
Advanced version
InformationInformation
139
Relationship between video signals and monitor output
MAIN ZONE MONITOR OUT
Video Convert
Input connector Output connector Menu displayed
HDMI COMPONENT S-VIDEO VIDEO HDMI COMPONENT VIDEO HDMI COMPONENT VIDEO
ON/OFF
A A A A A A A
Only the menu is displayed
ON
A A A S S <VIDEO> S <VIDEO> S <VIDEO> S (VIDEO) S (VIDEO) S (VIDEO)
ON
A A S A
S <S-VIDEO> S <S-VIDEO> S <S-VIDEO> S (S-VIDEO) S (S-VIDEO) S (S-VIDEO)
ON
A A S S
ON
A S (1080p) A A
S <COMPONENT>
S <COMPONENT>
A
S (COMPONENT)
A (COMPONENT)
z2
A
z2
ON
A S (1080i – 480p) A A
S (COMPONENT)
A
ON
A S (480i/576i) A A S <COMPONENT> S (COMPONENT)
ON
A S (1080p) A S
S <VIDEO>
A (COMPONENT) A (VIDEO)
ON
z1
A S (1080p) A S
S (VIDEO) S (VIDEO)
ON
A S (1080i – 480p) A S
S <COMPONENT> S (COMPONENT)
S (COMPONENT)
A (VIDEO)
ON
A S (480i/576i) A S S <COMPONENT> S (COMPONENT)
ON
A S (1080p) S A
S <S-VIDEO>
A (COMPONENT) A (S-VIDEO)
ON
z1
A S (1080p) S A
S (S-VIDEO) S (S-VIDEO)
ON
A S (1080i – 480p) S A
S <COMPONENT> S (COMPONENT)
S (COMPONENT)
A (S-VIDEO)
ON
A S (480i/576i) S A S <COMPONENT> S (COMPONENT)
ON
A S (1080p) S S
S <S-VIDEO>
A (COMPONENT) A (S-VIDEO)
ON
z1
A S (1080p) S S
S (S-VIDEO) S (S-VIDEO)
ON
A S (1080i – 480p) S S
S <COMPONENT> S (COMPONENT) S (COMPONENT)
A (S-VIDEO)
ON
A S (480i/576i) S S S <COMPONENT> S (COMPONENT)
ON
S A A A
S <HDMI>
A
A
S (HDMI)
A
z2
A z2
ON
S A A S S <VIDEO> A (VIDEO)
z2
ON
S A S A
S <S-VIDEO> A (S-VIDEO)
z2
ON
S A S S
ON
S S A A
S <COMPONENT>
A
A (COMPONENT)
z2
A
z2
ON
S S A S S <VIDEO> A (VIDEO)
z2
ON
S S S A
S <S-VIDEO> A (S-VIDEO)
z2
ON
S S S S
OFF
A A A S
A
A
S <VIDEO>
Only the menu is displayed
OFF
A A S A
S <S-VIDEO>
OFF
A A S S
OFF
A S A A
S <COMPONENT>
A
OFF
A
S A S S <VIDEO>
OFF
A S S A
S <S-VIDEO>
OFF
A S S S
OFF
S A A A
S <HDMI>
A
A
OFF
S A A S S <VIDEO>
OFF
S A S A
S <S-VIDEO>
OFF
S A S S
OFF
S S A A
S <COMPONENT>
A
OFF
S S A S S <VIDEO>
OFF
S S S A
S <S-VIDEO>
OFF
S S S S
S Video signal input present
A No video signal input
z1 When no HDMI monitor is connected or the HDMI monitor’s power is not on
S < > The input signal between the < > marks is output.
A No video signal output
S ( ) Superimposed on the picture indicated in ( ).
A ( ) Only the picture in ( ) is output.
A Neither the picture nor the menu is output.
z2 Only the menu is displayed when no HDMI monitor is connected or the
HDMI monitor’s power is not on.
Basic version
Advanced version
InformationInformation
vSee overleaf
140
ZONE2 MONITOR OUT
The main zone video conversion function is compatible with the following formats: NTSC, PAL, SECAM, NTSC4.43, PAL-N, PAL-M and PAL-60.
NOTE
•The status display screen cannot be displayed at a computer’s resolution (e.g. VGA) or while certain 3D video contents is being played.
•When the menu is operated on a computer’s resolution (e.g. VGA) or during playback of certain 3D video content, the playback image switches
to the menu screen image.
•When SECAM signals of video input are up-converted, the signals are output in PAL format from the Video connectors.
Input connector Output connector
S-VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO
A A A
A S S <VIDEO>
S A S <S-VIDEO>
S S S <S-VIDEO>
S < > The input signal between the < > marks is output.
A No video signal output
Video signal resolution conversion table
When “Video Convert” (vpage92) is set to “ON”, “i/p Scaler” (vpage92) is set to “Analog”, “Analog & HDMI” or “HDMI” are set, the resolution of the input video signal can be converted to a different
resolution for output (vpage5 “Converting input video signals for output (Video conversion function)”).
The relationship between the resolution of the convertible video signal and HDMI output resolution is shown in the table below.
HDMI Output
Output resolution
Input resolution
480i/576iz1
480p/576p 1080i 720p 1080p 1080p 24Hz
Video/S-Video Input
NTSC/NTSC4.43/PAL-M/PAL-60
S (480i) S (480p) S S S S
PAL/PAL-N/SECAM
S (576i) S (576p) S S S
Component video input
480i
S (480i) S (480p) S S S S
576i
S (576i) S (576p) S S S
480p
S (480p) S S S S
576p
S (576p) S S S
1080i
S S S S
720p
S S S S
1080p 60Hz
S S
1080p 50Hz
S
HDMI Input
480i
S (480i) S (480p) S S S S
576i
S (576i) S (576p) S S S
480p
S (480p) S S S S
576p
S (576p) S S S
1080i
S S S S
720p
S S S S
1080p 24Hz
Sz2 Sz3
1080p 60Hz
S S
1080p 50Hz
S
S The resolution set in “Resolution” (vpage92) in the menu is output.
( ) The resolution inside ( ) is output.
Output at the same resolution as the input video signal resolution.
z1 Only output when “i/p Scaler” in the menu is set to “OFF”.
z2 The resolution set in “Resolution” (vpage 92) in the menu is set to “Auto”, and a television that does not support 1080p 24Hz video signals is
connected.
z3 The resolution set in “Resolution” (vpage92) in the menu is set to “Auto”, and a television that supports 1080p 24Hz video signals is connected.
NOTE
•Video/component video output is output at the same resolution as the input video signal resolution.
•The 3D, Computer resolution, “x.v.Color”, sYCC601 color, Adobe RGB color or Adobe YCC601 color input to HDMI is output at the same resolution as the input video signal.
•When “Video Mode” in the menu is set to “Game” or “Auto” and game contents are played, the same resolution as the input video signal is output.
•When “Resolution” in the menu is set to “Auto”, the number of pixels in the television panel connected to the HDMI output connector is automatically detected, and the optimum resolution is output according to
the table above.
Relationship between video signals and monitor output
Basic version
Advanced version
InformationInformation
141
Explanation of terms
A
Adobe RGB color, Adobe YCC601 color
Like “x.v.Color”, each of these color spaces defines
a palette of available colors that is larger than the
traditional RGB color model.
AirPlay
AirPlay sends (plays) contents recorded in iTunes
or on an iPhone/iPod touch/iPad to a compatible
device via the network.
AL24 Processing Plus
AL24 Processing for All Channels
DENON has further developed its proprietary AL24
Processing, an analog waveform reproduction
technology, to support the 192 kHz sampling
frequency. AL24 Processing Plus, thoroughly
suppresses quantization noise associated with D/A
conversion of LPCM signals to reproduce the low-
level signals with optimum clarity that will bring out
all the delicate nuances of the music.
Equipped foe not only front left and right channels
but also for the surround left and right, center and
subwoofer channels.
App Store
App Store is a site that sells application software
for such devices as the iPhone or iPod Touch, and
is operated by Apple Inc.
Audyssey Dynamic Surround Expansion™
(A-DSX)
Realistic reproduction of sound relies on the
ability of audio systems to match human hearing
performance. Three key requirements are: (1)
frequency response, (2) dynamic range, and (3)
accurate spatial reproduction. The requirements for
frequency response have already been surpassed
with sampling rates that exceed human hearing.
The dynamic range limits of human perception
have also been met with current digital audio
systems operating capable of signal to noise ratios
that approach 120 dB. Accurate spatial sound
rendering, however, has not yet reached the limits
of perception as human perception relies on the
combination of sounds arriving from many more
directions than what 5.1-channel surround sound
systems provide. Audyssey DSX™ technology was
developed to overcome the spatial sound rendering
limitations faced by 5.1-channel surround sound
formats.
The ITU 5.1-channel channel standard recommends
three front loudspeakers and two rear loudspeakers.
The Left (L) and Right (R) front loudspeakers should
be placed at ±30° relative to the central listening
position. The Center (C) loudspeaker should be at
0° and the surround loudspeakers (SL, SR) should
be placed between 100° and 120°. All loudspeakers
must be equidistant from the center listening
position or compensated with time delay if that
is not possible. A separate low-frequency effects
(LFE) channel is used to reproduce additional bass
content from the subwoofer.
There are certain things that 5.1-channel surround
sound systems do well compared to 2-channel
stereo. For example, it is possible to move sounds
across the front seamlessly. It is also possible
to create ambience behind the listener. But 5.1
channel surround systems do not provide enough
channels from which to render the required reflected
sound components for a seamless and enveloping
soundstage. Unfortunately, the additional two back
surround channels in 7.1-channel systems are not
in the right place to provide a significant perceptual
improvement.
Adding more channels to a surround system is
not for special effects. Accurate spatial sound
reproduction requires rendering of directional
sound cues and non-directional ambient cues.
Refl ections arriving after the direct sound play a
critical role in the perception of soundstage width
and depth. To have the most impact, additional
surround channels should be used to control the
direction, time of arrival, and frequency response
of the refl ected sound to render an expanded
soundstage that reproduces sound with better
localization and envelopment than what 5.1-channel
systems provide.
Research in the perception of auditory source width
has shown that there are strong preferences in the
direction of refl ected sound and the perception of
soundstage width and spaciousness. The single
most important direction of side-wall refl ections
is ±60°. Audyssey DSX™ provides a pair of Wide
channels (LW and RW) at ±60° with appropriate
frequency response and perceptual processing
to match the requirements of human hearing. In
fact, the Wide channels are much more critical
in the presentation of a realistic soundstage than
then Back Surround channels found in traditional
7.1-channel systems. A more enveloping
7.1-channel system is one in which Wide speakers
are used instead of Back Surround speakers.
Adding surround channels behind the listener has
a very small impact compared to the increase in
envelopment and soundstage width that the front
wide channels will provide.
After side refl ections, the next most important
acoustical and perceptual cues come from refl
ections above the front stage. Audyssey DSX™
provides a pair of Height channels (LH and RH) at
a ±45° azimuth angle and elevated to a 45° angle in
the median plane.
In addition to creating new Wide and Height
channels, Audyssey DSX™ also provides Surround
Processing to enhance the envelopment of the
Surround and Back Surround channels (if present).
Audyssey DSX™ Surround Processing analyzed the
standard surround signals in the time and frequency
domains to improve the perceived sense of
envelopment and blending with the other speakers
in the surround system.
Audyssey DSX™ is a scalable system that can
adapt to the practical needs of the user. The first
level of surround stage enhancement comes from
adding the Wide channels. The second level comes
from adding the Height channels. If it is practical
to have both Wides and Heights then the surround
performance will be further enhanced. Audyssey
DSX™ automatically reconfigures its processing to
optimize surround rendering over any number of
available speakers beyond that of 5.1-channel.
Audyssey Dynamic EQ
®
Dynamic EQ
®
solves the problem of deteriorating
sound quality as volume is decreased by taking into
account human perception and room acoustics.
Audyssey Dynamic EQ
®
works in tandem with
Audyssey MultEQ
®
XT to provide well-balanced
sound for every listener at any volume level.
Audyssey Dynamic Volume
®
Dynamic Volume
®
solves the problem of large
variations in volume level between television
programs, commercials, and between the soft and
loud passages of movies. Audyssey Dynamic EQ
®
is integrated into Dynamic Volume
®
so that as
the playback volume is adjusted automatically, the
perceived bass response, tonal balance, surround
impression, and dialog clarity remain the same.
Audyssey MultEQ
®
XT
MultEQ
®
XT is a room equalization solution
that calibrates any audio system so that it can
achieve optimum performance for every listener
in a large listening area. Based on several room
measurements, MultEQ
®
XT calculates an
equalization solution that corrects for both time
and frequency response problems in the listening
area and also performs a fully automated surround
system setup.
Auto Lip Sync
If you connect the unit to a TV that supports the
Auto Lip Sync function, it can automatically correct
delay between the audio and video.
D
Deep Color
This technology allows expression of more number
of colors than the conventional 8 bits and can
reproduce colors close to natural ones without color
streak.
DLNA
DLNA and DLNA CERTIFIED are trademarks and/
or service marks of Digital Living Network Alliance.
Some contents may not be compatible with other
DLNA CERTIFIED™ products.
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a multi-channel digital signal format
developed by Dolby Laboratories.
A total of 5.1 channels are played: 3 front channels
(“FL”, “FR” and “C”), 2 surround channels
(“SL” and “SR”) and the “LFE” channel for low
frequencies.
Because of this, there is no crosstalk between
channels and a realistic sound field with a “three-
dimensional” feeling (sense of distance, movement
and positioning) is achieved.
A realistic, powerful sense of presence is achieved
when playing movie sources in AV rooms as well.
Basic version
Advanced version
InformationInformation
142
Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital EX is a 6.1-channel surround format
proposed by Dolby Laboratories that allows users
to enjoy in their homes the “DOLBY DIGITAL
SURROUND EX” audio format jointly developed by
Dolby Laboratories and Lucas Films.
The 6.1 channels of sound, including surround back
channels, provide improved sound positioning and
expression of space.
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus is an improved Dolby Digital signal
format that is compatible with up to 7.1 channels
of discrete digital sound and also improves sound
quality thanks to extra data bit rate performance.
It is upwardly compatible with conventional Dolby
Digital, so it offers greater flexibility in response to
the source signal and the conditions of the playback
device.
Dolby Pro Logic g
Dolby Pro Logic g is a matrix decoding technology
developed by Dolby Laboratories.
Regular music such as that on CDs is encoded into
5 channels to achieve an excellent surround effect.
The surround channel signals are converted into
stereo and full band signals (with a frequency
response of 20 Hz to 20 kHz or greater) to create
a “three-dimensional” sound image offering a rich
sense of presence for all stereo sources.
Dolby Pro Logic gx
Dolby Pro Logic gx is a further improved version of
the Dolby Pro Logic g matrix decoding technology.
Audio signals recorded in 2 channels are decoded
to achieve a natural sound with up to 7.1 channels.
There are three modes: “Music” suited for playing
music, “Cinema” suited for playing movies, and
“Game” which is optimized for playing games.
Dolby Pro Logic gz
Dolby Pro Logic gz introduces a new dimension to
Home Entertainment through the addition of a pair
of front height channels. Compatible with stereo,
5.1-channel and 7.1-channel content, Dolby Pro
Logic gz provides enhanced spaciousness, depth
and dimension to movies, concert video and video
game playback while maintaining the full integrity
of the source mix.
Dolby Pro Logic gz identifies and decodes spatial
cues that occur naturally in all content, directing
this information to the front height channels,
complementing the performance of left and right
surround sound speakers. Content that is encoded
Explanation of terms
with Dolby Pro Logic gz height channel information
can be even more revealing, with perceptually
discrete height channel information bringing an
exciting new dimension to home entertainment.
Dolby Pro Logic gz, with front height channels is
also an ideal alternative for households that cannot
support the placement of back surround speakers
of a typical 7.1-channel system but may have
bookshelf space available to support the addition of
height speakers.
Downmix
This function converts the number of channels of
surround audio to less number of channels and
plays back.
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is a high definition audio technology
developed by Dolby Laboratories, using lossless
coding technology to faithfully reproduce the sound
of the studio master.
This format provides the facility to support up to
8 audio channels with a sampling frequency of
96kHz/24bit resolution and up to 6 audio channels
with a sampling frequency of 192kHz/24bit
resolution. Dolby TrueHD is adopted for applications
that put very high importance on sound quality.
DTS
This is an abbreviation of Digital Theater System,
which is a digital audio system developed by DTS.
When playing back audio by connecting this system
with a device such as DTS amplifier, accurate sound
field position and realistic sound effect as if you are
in a movie theater can be obtained.
DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 is a digital audio format enabling high
sound quality playback in 5.1 channels with a
sampling frequency of 96 kHz and 24 bit quantization
on DVD-Video.
DTS Digital Surround
DTS Digital Surround is the standard digital surround
format of DTS, Inc., compatible with a sampling
frequency of 44.1 or 48 kHz and up to 5.1 channels
of digital discrete surround sound.
DTS-ES™ Discrete 6.1
DTS-ES™ Discrete 6.1 is a 6.1-channel discrete
digital audio format adding a surround back (SB)
channel to the DTS digital surround sound.
Decoding of conventional 5.1-channel audio signals
is also possible according to the decoder.
DTS-ES™ Matrix 6.1
DTS-ES™ Matrix 6.1 is a 6.1-channel discrete digital
audio format inserting a surround back (SB) channel
to the DTS digital surround sound through matrix
encoding. Decoding of conventional 5.1-channel
audio signals is also possible according to the
decoder.
DTS Express
DTS Express is an audio format supporting low bit
rates (max. 5.1 channels, 24 to 256 kbps).
DTS-HD
This audio technology provides higher sound quality
and enhanced functionality than the conventional
DTS and is adopted as an optional audio for Blu-ray
Disc. This technology supports multi-channel, high
data transfer speed, high sampling frequency, and
lossless audio playback. Maximum 7.1-channels are
supported in Blu-ray Disc.
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is an improved
version of the conventional DTS, DTS-ES and
DTS 96/24 signals formats, compatible with
sampling frequencies of 96 or 48 kHz and up to
7.1 channels of discrete digital sound. High data
bit rate performance provides high quality sound.
This format is fully compatible with conventional
products, including conventional DTS digital
surround 5.1-channel data.
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD Master Audio is a lossless audio format
created by Digital Theater System (DTS). This
format provides the facility to support up to 8 audio
channels with a sampling frequency of 96kHz/24bit
resolution and up to 6 audio channels with a
sampling frequency of 192kHz/24bit resolution.
It is fully compatible with conventional products,
including conventional DTS digital surround
5.1-channel data.
DTS NEO:6™ Surround
DTS NEO:6™ is a matrix decoding technology
for achieving 6.1-channel surround playback
with 2-channel sources. It includes “DTS NEO:6
Cinema” suited for playing movies and “DTS
NEO:6 Music” suited for playing music.
Dynamic range
The difference between the maximum undistorted
sound level and the minimum discernible level
above the noise emitted by the device.
F
FLAC
FLAC stands for Free lossless Audio Codec, and is a
lossless free audio file format. Lossless means that
the audio is compressed without any loss in quality.
The FLAC license is as shown below.
Copyright (C) 2000,2001,2002,2003,2004,2005,200
6,2007,2008,2009 Josh Coalson
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
•Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer.
•Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the
above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer in the documentation and/
or other materials provided with the distribution.
•Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor
the names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products derived from this
software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS
IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED
AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER
IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Basic version
Advanced version
InformationInformation
143
Explanation of terms
H
HDCP
When transmitting digital signals between devices,
this copyright protection technology encrypts
the signals to prevent content from being copied
without authorization.
HDMI
This is an abbreviation of High-Definition Multimedia
Interface, which is an AV digital interface that can
be connected to a TV or amplifier. Video signal and
audio signal can be connected using 1 cable.
I
iTunes
iTunes is the name of the multimedia player
provided by Apple Inc. It enables management
and playback of multimedia contents including
music and movies. iTunes supports many main file
formats including AAC, WAV, and MP3.
L
LFE
This is an abbreviation of Low Frequency Effect,
which is an output channel that emphasizes
low frequency effect sound. Surround audio is
intensified by outputting 20 Hz to 120 Hz deep
bass.
M
MAIN ZONE
The room where this unit is placed is called the
MAIN ZONE .
MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer-3)
This is an internationally standardized audio data
compression scheme, using the “MPEG-1” video
compression standard. It compresses the data
volume to about one eleventh its original size while
maintaining sound quality equivalent to a music CD.
MPEG (Moving Picture Experts Group), MPEG-2,
MPEG-4
These are the names for digital compression format
standards used for the encoding of video and audio.
Video standards include “MPEG-1 Video”, “MPEG-
2 Video”, “MPEG-4 Visual”, “MPEG-4 AVC”. Audio
standards include “MPEG-1 Audio”, “MPEG-2
Audio”, “MPEG-4 AAC”.
P
Progressive (sequential scanning)
This is a scanning system of video signal that
displays 1 frame of video as one image. Compared
to the interlace system, this system provides
images with less flickering and bleeding.
Protection Circuit
This is a function to prevent damage to devices
within the power supply when an abnormality
such as an overload, excess voltage occurs or
temperature for any reason.
In this unit, the power indicator blinks and the unit
enters standby mode when an abnormality occurs.
S
Sampling frequency
Sampling involves taking a reading of a sound wave
(analog signal) at regular intervals and expressing
the height of the wave at each reading in digitized
format (producing a digital signal).
The number of readings taken in one second is
called the “sampling frequency”. The larger the
value, the closer the reproduced sound is to the
original.
Speaker impedance
This is an AC resistance value, indicated in Ω
(ohms). Greater power can be obtained with this
value smaller.
sYCC601 color
Like “x.v.Color”, each of these color spaces defines
a palette of available colors that is larger than the
traditional RGB color model.
V
vTuner
This is a free online content server for Internet
radio. Note that usage fees are included in upgrade
costs.
For inquiries about this service, visit the vTuner site
below.
vTuner website: http://www.radiodenon.com
This product is protected by certain intellectual
property rights of Nothing Else Matters Software
and BridgeCo. Use or distribution of such technology
outside of this product is prohibited without a
license from Nothing Else Matters Software and
BridgeCo or an authorized subsidiary.
W
Windows Media DRM
This is a copyright protection technology developed
by Microsoft.
Content providers are using the digital rights
management technology for Windows Media
contained in this device (WM-DRM) to protect
the integrity of their content (Secure Content) so
that their intellectual property, including copyright,
in such content is not misappropriated. This
device uses WM-DRM software to play Secure
Content (WM-DRM Software). If the security of
the WM-DRM Software in this device has been
compromised, owners of Secure Content (Secure
Content Owners) may request that Microsoft
revoke the WM-DRM Software’s right to acquire
new licenses to copy, display and/or play Secure
Content. Revocation does not alter the WM-DRM
Software’s ability to play unprotected content.
A list of revoked WM-DRM Software is sent to
your device whenever you download a license for
Secure Content from the Internet or from a PC.
Microsoft may, in conjunction with such license,
also download revocation list onto your device on
behalf of Secure Content Owners.
Windows Media Player Ver.11 or later
This is a media player distributed free of charge by
Microsoft Corporation.
It can play playlists created with Ver.11 or later of
Windows Media Player, as well as WMA, DRM
WMA, WAV, and other files.
WMA (Windows Media Audio)
This is audio compression technology developed by
Microsoft Corporation.
WMA data can be encoded using Windows
Media
®
Player Ver.7, 7.1, Windows Media
®
Player
for Windows
®
XP and Windows Media
®
Player 9
Series.
To encode WMA files, only use applications
authorized by Microsoft Corporation. If you use
an unauthorized application, the file may not work
properly.
X
x.v.Color
This function lets HDTVs display colors more
accurately. It enables display with natural, vivid
colors. “x.v.Color” is a Sony registered trademark.
Z
ZONE2
This unit can operate in a room other than the room
where this unit is placed (MAIN ZONE) (ZONE2
playback). The room for ZONE2 playback is called
ZONE2.
ZONE3
This unit can operate in a room other than the room
where this unit is placed (MAIN ZONE) (ZONE3
playback). The room for ZONE3 playback is called
ZONE3.
Basic version
Advanced version
InformationInformation
144
Troubleshooting
If a problem should arise, first check the following:
1. Are the connections correct?
2. Is the set being operated as described in the owner’s manual?
3. Are the other devices operating properly?
If this unit does not operate properly, check the items listed in the table below. Should the problem persist,
there may be a malfunction.
In this case, disconnect the power immediately and contact your store of purchase.
GGeneralH
Symptom Cause/Solution Page
Power does not turn
on.
•Check whether the power plug is correctly inserted into the power
outlet.
•The protection circuit is active. Disconnect the power plug from
the electric outlet, wait 5 to 10 seconds and then insert it back
into the outlet.
C 5
143
Display is off. •Set “Dimmer” on the menu to something other than “OFF”.
116
The power indicator
is blinking red
in intervals of
approximately 2
seconds.
•The temperature inside the unit has risen. Please turn off power
once, and re-apply the power after the temperature has fallen
sufficiently.
•Please re-install this unit in a place having good ventilation.
The power indicator
is blinking red
in intervals of
approximately 0.5
seconds.
•Please use speakers which have the specified impedance.
•The speaker cable has shorted (is touching). Firmly twist the core
wire in the speaker cable, and then re-connect it to the speaker
terminal.
C 6
C 6,
61
After turning on the
power, the power
indicator is blinking
red in intervals of
approximately 0.5
seconds.
•This unit amplifier circuit has failed. Turn off the power and please
contact the DENON service adviser.
Set does not operate
properly.
•Reset the microprocessor.
148
GHDMIH
Symptom Cause/Solution Page
No audio is
output with HDMI
connection.
•Check the connection of the HDMI connectors.
•When outputting HDMI audio from the speakers, set “HDMI
Audio Out” on the menu to “Amp”.
•When outputting HDMI audio from a TV, set “HDMI Audio Out”
on the menu to “TV”.
8
107
107
No video is
output with HDMI
connection.
•Check the connection of the HDMI connectors.
•Set the input source to match the connected HDMI connector.
•Check whether the TV is compatible with copyright protection
(HDCP). If connected to a device not compatible with HDCP, video
will not be output correctly.
8
8, 28
7
When the following
operations are
performed on
devices compatible
with HDMI control,
the same operations
occur on this unit.
•Power ON/OFF
•Switching audio
output devices
•Adjust volume
•Switch input source
•Set “HDMI Control” – “Control” in the menu to “OFF”.
Furthermore, if you do not want to link the power off operation
with devices compatible with HDMI control, set “Power Off
Control” in the menu to “OFF”.
70, 108
GVideoH
Symptom Cause/Solution Page
No picture appears. •Check the TV connection.
•Set the TV input correctly.
C 3
C 3
Basic version
Advanced version
InformationInformation
145
GAudioH
Symptom Cause/Solution Page
Audio is not output. •Check the connections for all devices.
•Check the speaker connections and configurations.
•Check whether the audio device power is turned on.
•Adjust the master volume.
•Cancel the mute mode.
•Select a suitable input source.
•Select a suitable input mode.
•Disconnect the headphones. No sound is output from the speakers
or the PRE OUT connectors when headphones are connected.
C3,8,
10,11,12,13,
14,15,16,17,
18,19
C6,61,
62,64,65,66
29, 82
29, 82
28, 82
93
127
No sound is
produced from
surround speaker.
•Check if the surround speakers are connected to the SURROUND
terminals.
No sound is
produced from
surround back
speaker.
•Check if “Amp Assign” is set appropriately in order to output
audio from the surround back speakers.
•Set “Speaker Config.” – “Surr.Back” on the menu to something
other than “None”.
•Set “Surround Parameters” – “Surround Back” on the menu to
something other than “OFF”.
•Set the surround mode to something other than “STEREO” and
“VIRTUAL“.
104
105
98
53
No sound is
produced from front
height speaker.
•Set “Surround Parameters” – “PLgz Height” on the menu to
“ON”.
•Check if “Amp Assign” is set appropriately in order to output
audio from the front height speakers.
•Set “Speaker Config.” – “Front Height” on the menu to something
other than “None”.
98
104
105
No sound is
produced from
subwoofer.
•Check the subwoofer connections.
•Turn on the subwoofer’s power.
•Set “Speaker Config.” – “Subwoofer” on the menu to “Yes”.
•If “Front” and “Center” for “Speaker Config.” are set to “Large”,
and “Subwoofer Mode” is set to “LFE”, no sound may be output
from the subwoofers, depending on the input signal or selected
surround mode.
C6,61,
62,64,65,66
104
104, 105
Symptom Cause/Solution Page
DTS sound is not
output.
•Set “Decode Mode” on the menu to “Auto” or “DTS”.
93
Dolby TrueHD, DTS-
HD, Dolby Digital
Plus audio is not
output.
•Make HDMI connections.
8
Dolby PLg mode or
DTS NEO:6 mode
cannot be selected.
•Check that “Speaker Config.” – “Center” or “Surround” is set
to other than “None”. If the speaker system is 2.0/2.1ch, this
surround mode cannot be selected.
•When headphones are used, Dolby PLg or DTS NEO:6 cannot be
selected.
104
Audyssey DSX™
cannot be selected.
•Check that “Speaker Config.” – “Front Height” or “Front Wide” is
set to other than “None”.
•Check that “Speaker Config.” – “Center” is set to other than
“None”.
•Switch the surround mode to STANDARD.
•When headphones are used, Audyssey DSX™ cannot be selected.
105
104
53
Audyssey MultEQ
®
XT, Audyssey
Dynamic EQ
®
and
Audyssey Dynamic
Volume
®
cannot be
selected.
•Switch the surround mode to other than “DIRECT” or “PURE
DIRECT”.
•When headphones are used, MultEQ
®
XT, Dynamic EQ
®
and
Dynamic Volume
®
cannot be selected.
53
Dynamic EQ
®
and
Dynamic Volume
®
cannot be selected.
•Run Audyssey
®
Auto Setup.
21, 67
RESTORER cannot
be selected.
•Check that an analog signal or PCM signal (fs=44.1/48 kHz) is
input. For playback of multichannel signals such as Dolby Digital
or DTS surround, RESTORER cannot be used.
•Switch the surround mode to other than “DIRECT” or “PURE
DIRECT”.
102
53
Basic version
Advanced version
InformationInformation
146
GRadioH
Symptom Cause/Solution Page
Reception fails, or
there is a lot of noise
or distortion.
•Change the antenna orientation or position.
•Separate the AM loop antenna from the unit.
•Use an FM outdoor antenna.
•Separate the antenna from other connection cables.
16
16
16
16
GControl dock for iPodH
Symptom Cause/Solution Page
iPod cannot be
played.
•Check the iPod connections.
•Insert the AC adaptor of the iPod control dock into the power
outlet.
•Switch the input source to “DOCK”.
14
28
GInternet radio / Media server / iPod / USB memory device / Flickr / Last.fm / NapsterH
Symptom Cause/Solution Page
When a USB
memory device is
connected, “USB” is
not displayed on the
menu.
•The set cannot recognize a USB memory device. Check the
connection.
•A USB memory device not conforming to mass storage class or
MTP standards is connected. Connect a USB memory device
conforming to mass storage class or MTP standards.
•A USB memory device that the set cannot recognize is connected.
This is not a malfunction. DENON does not guarantee that all USB
memory devices will operate or receive power.
•USB memory device is connected via USB hub. Connect the USB
memory device directly to the USB port.
15
Files on a USB
memory device
cannot be played.
•USB memory device is in format other than FAT16 or FAT32.
Set the format to FAT16 or FAT32. For details, refer to the USB
memory device’s operating instructions.
•USB memory device is divided into multiple partitions. When
divided into multiple partitions, only files stored in the top partition
can be played.
•Files are stored in a non-compatible format. Record the files in a
compatible format.
•You are attempting to play a file that is copyright protected. Files
that are copyright protected cannot be played on this unit.
51
51
The file names
are not displayed
properly (“...”, etc.).
•Characters that cannot be displayed are used. This is not a
malfunction. On this unit, characters that cannot be displayed are
replaced with a “.” (period).
Symptom Cause/Solution Page
Internet radio cannot
be played.
•Ethernet cable is not properly connected or network is
disconnected. Check the connection status.
•Program is being broadcast in non-compatible format. Only
Internet radio programs in MP3 and WMA can be played on this
unit.
•The router’s firewall is activated. Check the router’s firewall
settings.
•Radio station is not currently broadcasting. Choose a radio station
that is currently broadcasting.
•IP address is wrong. Check the set’s IP address.
19
39
41
113
Files stored on a
computer cannot be
played.
•Files are stored in a non-compatible format. Record in a compatible
format.
•You are attempting to play a file that is copyright protected. Files
that are copyright protected cannot be played on this unit.
•Set and computer are connected by USB cable. The set’s USB
port cannot be used for connection to a computer.
39
39
Server is not found,
or it is not possible
to connect to the
server.
•The computer’s or router’s firewall is activated. Check the
computer’s or router’s firewall settings.
•Computer’s power is not turned on. Turn on the power.
•Server is not running. Launch the server.
•Set’s IP address is wrong. Check the set’s IP address.
113
iPod cannot be
played.
•Some iPods do not support being used connected directly to the
USB port.
15
Cannot connect to
preset or favorite
radio stations.
•Radio station is not currently broadcasting. Wait a while before
trying again.
•Radio station is not currently in service. It is not possible to
connect to radio stations that are no longer in service.
For some radio
stations, “Radio
station server full” or
“Connection down”
is displayed and
station cannot be
connected to.
•Station is congested or not currently broadcasting. Wait a while
before trying again.
Sound is broken
during playback.
•Network’s signal transfer speed is slow or communications lines
or radio station is congested. This is not a malfunction. When
playing broadcast data with a high bit rate, the sound may be
broken, depending on the communications conditions.
Basic version
Advanced version
InformationInformation
vSee overleaf
147
Symptom Cause/Solution Page
Sound quality is poor
or played sound is
noisy.
•File being played has a low bit rate. This is not a malfunction.
Cannot compile
Playlist.
•This unit does not respond to playlist compilation. When the
playlist is compiled in PC Application, it is registered to “My
Library”. In this way, the playlist can be played in this unit
Cannot delete
Tracks, Playlists,
Channels registered
in “My Library”
•Cannot be done with this unit. Delete from PC Application.
Cannot login to
Napster. (“Incorrect
Username or
Password” is
displayed.)
•Login information is incorrect. Check if the Username for Napster
has been properly entered. Re-enter the Password. (Password is
not displayed.)
http://www.napster.com/choose/index_default.html
49,113
GAirPlayH
Symptom Cause/Solution Page
The AirPlay icon
is not displayed
in iTunes or on the
iPhone/iPod touch/
iPad.
•This unit and the computer or iPhone/iPod touch/iPad are not
connected to the same network (LAN). Connect the computer or
iPhone/iPod touch/iPad to the same network as this unit.
•iTunes or the iPhone/iPod touch/iPad do not have firmware that
supports AirPlay installed. Update to the latest firmware.
19
117
No sound. •The volume in iTunes or on the iPhone/iPod touch/iPad is set to
the minimum setting. Adjust the volume to the optimum level.
•This unit is not selected in the screen that is displayed when
iTunes or the iPhone/iPod touch/iPad is started. Start iTunes or
switch on the iPhone/iPod touch/iPad, click the AirPlay icon
in
the displayed screen, and select this unit.
75
GRemote Control UnitH
Symptom Cause/Solution Page
The set cannot be
operated with the
remote control unit.
•Batteries are worn out. Replace with new batteries.
•Operate the remote control unit within a distance of about
7 m from this unit and at an angle of within 30°.
•Remove any obstacle between this unit and the remote control
unit.
•Insert the batteries in the proper direction, checking the q and
w marks.
•The set’s remote control sensor is exposed to strong light (direct
sunlight, inverter type fluorescent bulb light, etc.). Move the set
to a place in which the remote control sensor will not be exposed
to strong light.
•The ZONE SELECT setting is not correct. Press
ZONE SELECT to
select the zone to operate.
•The operation mode does not match the settings of the device to
operate. Check the operation mode.
131
131
131
131
131
120
120
Basic version
Advanced version
InformationInformation
148
Resetting the microprocessor
Perform this procedure if the display is abnormal or if operations cannot be performed.
When the microprocessor is reset, all the settings are reset to their default values.
ON/STANDBY
PRESET CHANNEL 3
PRESET CHANNEL 2
1
Turn off the power using ON/STANDBY.
2
Press ON/STANDBY while simultaneously pressing PRESET CHANNEL 2 and
PRESET CHANNEL 3.
3
Once the display starts ashing at intervals of about 1 second, release the two
buttons.
If in step 3 the display does not flash at intervals of about 1 second, start over from step 1.
Basic version
Advanced version
InformationInformation
149
Specifications
n Audio section
•Power amplifier
Rated output: Front:
125 W + 125 W (8 Ω, 20 Hz – 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.)
165 W + 165 W (6 Ω, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.)
Center:
125 W (8 Ω, 20 Hz – 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.)
165 W (6 Ω, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.)
Surround:
125 W + 125 W (8 Ω, 20 Hz – 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.)
165 W + 165 W (6 Ω, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.)
Surround back/Front height/Front wide:
125 W + 125 W (8 Ω, 20 Hz – 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.)
165 W + 165 W (6 Ω, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.)
Dynamic power: 130 W x 2ch (8 Ω)
190 W x 2ch (4 Ω)
Output connectors: 6 – 16 Ω
•Analog
Input sensitivity/Input impedance: 200 mV/47 kΩ
Frequency response: 10 Hz – 100 kHz — +1, –3 dB (DIRECT mode)
S/N: 102 dB (IHF–A weighted, DIRECT mode)
Distortion: 0.005 % (20 Hz – 20 kHz) (DIRECT mode)
Rated output: 1.2 V
•Digital
D/A output: Rated output — 2 V (at 0 dB playback)
Total harmonic distortion — 0.008 % (1 kHz, at 0 dB)
S/N ratio — 102 dB
Dynamic range — 100 dB
Digital input: Format — Digital audio interface
•Phono equalizer (PHONO input — REC OUT)
Input sensitivity: 2.5 mV
RIAA deviation: ±1 dB (20 Hz to 20 kHz)
S/N: 74 dB (A weighting, with 5 mV input)
Rated output: 150 mV
Distortion factor: 0.03 % (1 kHz, 3 V)
n Video section
•Standard video connectors
Input/output level and impedance: 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω
Frequency response: 5 Hz – 10 MHz — 0, –3 dB (when “Video Convert” set to “OFF”)
•Color component video connector
Input/output level and impedance: Y (brightness) signal — 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω
P
B / CB signal — 0.7 Vp-p, 75 Ω
P
R / CR signal — 0.7 Vp-p, 75 Ω
Frequency response: 5 Hz – 60 MHz — 0, –3 dB (when “Video Convert” set to “OFF”)
n Tuner section [FM] [AM]
(Note: μV at 75 Ω, 0 dBf = 1 x 10
–15
W)
Receiving Range: 87.5 MHz – 108.0 MHz 522 kHz – 1611 kHz
Usable Sensitivity: 1.2 μV (12.8 dBf) 18 μV
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity: MONO 2.0 μV (17.3 dBf)
STEREO 42 μV (34.5 dBf)
S/N: MONO 72 dB (IHF–A weighted, DIRECT mode)
STEREO 67 dB (IHF–A weighted, DIRECT mode)
Total harmonic Distortion (at 1 kHz): MONO 0.3 %
STEREO 0.7 %
n General
Power supply: AC 230 V, 50/60 Hz
Power consumption: 670 W
0.1 W (Standby)
2.2 W (CEC standby)
For purposes of improvement, specifications and design are subject to change without notice.
Basic version
Advanced version
InformationInformation
150
v Numerics
2.1-channel ························································· 64
2ch Direct/Stereo ············································· 109
3D ········································································· 7
5.1-channel ··················································· 60, 63
6.1-channel ··················································· 60, 62
7.1-channel ··················································· 59, 61
v A
Accessories ·························································· 2
Add New Feature ············································· 117
Adjust Channel ················································· 101
Adjusting the master volume ····························· 29
Adobe RGB color / Adobe YCC601 color ········· 141
A-DSX Soundstage ··········································· 101
AFDM ································································· 98
AirPlay ························································ 75, 141
AL24 Processing Plus ······································ 141
AM loop antenna ················································ 16
Amp Assign ······················································ 104
App Store ························································· 141
ARC ······································································ 7
Aspect ································································ 92
Audio Adjust ······················································· 97
Audio Delay ······················································ 102
Audio Setup ······················································ 109
AUDIO/VIDEO ADJUST ····································· 96
Audyssey
®
Auto Setup ································ 21, 67
Audyssey DSX™ ································ 59, 101, 141
Audyssey Dynamic EQ
®
·························· 100, 141
Audyssey Dynamic Volume
®
··················· 100, 141
Audyssey MultEQ
®
XT ···························· 100, 141
Audyssey Settings ··········································· 100
Auto Lip Sync ··········································· 107, 141
Auto Preset ························································ 94
Auto Setup ··················································· 21, 67
Auto Surround Mode ········································ 109
v B
Bass ··························································· 99, 114
Bass Setting ····················································· 105
Bi-amp ································································ 65
Brightness ························································ 102
Browse mode ··············································· 31, 33
v C
Cable
Audio cable ························ 11, 12, 13, 14, 17, 18
Coaxial digital cable···································· 11, 12
Component video cable ······················· 10, 11, 12
Ethernet cable·················································· 19
HDMI cable ························································ 8
Optical cable ·············································· 10, 13
S-Video cable ··················································· 13
Video cable ······························ 10, 11, 12, 13, 14
Center Image ····················································· 97
Center Width ······················································ 97
Channel ···························································· 114
Channel Level ············································· 72, 106
Characters ·························································· 87
Chroma Level ··················································· 102
Cinema EQ ························································· 97
Condensation ······················································· 3
Connection
Antenna ··························································· 16
Blu-ray Disc player ······································· 8, 11
Cable TV··························································· 12
CD player ························································· 17
Control dock for iPod ······································· 14
Digital camcorder ········································· 8, 14
Digital video recorder ··································· 8, 13
DVD player ··················································· 8, 11
External control device ···································· 20
External power amplifier ·································· 18
Game console ···················································· 8
HDMI ································································· 7
Home network (LAN) ······································· 19
iPod (USB)························································ 15
Record player ··················································· 17
Satellite tuner··················································· 12
Set-top box ·················································· 8, 12
Speaker ···························································· 61
TV································································· 8, 10
USB memory device ········································ 15
Content Type ························································ 7
Contrast ···························································· 102
Crossover Freq. ················································ 107
Curve Copy ······················································· 101
v D
D.COMP ····························································· 97
Decode Mode ···················································· 93
Deep Color ··················································· 7, 141
Delay Time ························································· 97
Dimension ·························································· 97
Dimmer ···························································· 116
Display ······························································ 128
Distance ··························································· 106
DLNA ································································ 141
DNR ·································································· 102
Dolby
Dolby Digital··················································· 141
Dolby Digital EX ············································· 142
Dolby Digital Plus ··········································· 142
Dolby Pro Logic II··········································· 142
Dolby Pro Logic IIx ········································· 142
Dolby Pro Logic IIz ··································· 59, 142
Dolby TrueHD ················································ 142
Downmix ·························································· 142
DRC ···································································· 97
DTS ·································································· 142
DTS 96/24 ······················································ 142
DTS Digital Surround ····································· 142
DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 ······································ 142
DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 ········································· 142
DTS Express ·················································· 142
DTS-HD ·························································· 142
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio ····················· 142
DTS-HD Master Audio ··································· 142
DTS NEO:6™ Surround ································· 142
Dynamic EQ
®
·················································· 100
Dynamic range ················································· 142
Dynamic Volume
®
··········································· 100
v E
Effect Level ························································ 97
Enhancer ·························································· 102
EQ Customize ·················································· 109
Error messages (Auto Setup) ····························· 26
v F
Fader function ···················································· 72
Firmware Update ············································· 117
FLAC ································································ 142
Flickr ····························································· 40, 45
FM/AM ······························································· 35
FM indoor antenna ············································· 16
Front A/B (connection) ································· 60, 64
Front Height ····················································· 105
Front height speaker ···································· 59, 61
Front Panel ······················································· 127
Front Speaker Setup ········································ 107
Front Wide ······················································· 105
Front wide speaker ······································ 59, 61
v G
GUI ··································································· 115
v H
HDCP ··························································· 7, 143
HDMI ···························································· 7, 143
HDMI 1.4a ···························································· 7
HDMI Audio Out ·············································· 107
HDMI Control ············································· 70, 108
HDMI Setup ····················································· 107
Headphones ····················································· 127
Height Gain ························································ 98
HPF ·································································· 114
Hue ··································································· 102
v I
INFORMATION ················································ 119
Audio Input Signal ·········································· 119
Auto Surround Mode ····································· 119
HDMI Information ·········································· 119
Preset Channel ·············································· 119
Quick Select··················································· 119
Status····························································· 119
Input Assign ······················································· 90
Input Mode ························································· 93
Input signal ······················································· 136
Inputting characters ··········································· 87
Interval ······························································· 94
iPod play ····························································· 34
i/p Scaler ····························································· 92
iTunes ······························································· 143
v L
Language ·························································· 118
Last.fm ························································· 40, 47
Lch Level ·························································· 114
LFE ····························································· 97, 143
Listening mode ·················································· 53
Listening position ··············································· 21
v M
Maintenance Mode ·········································· 118
MAIN ZONE ····················································· 143
Manual EQ ······················································· 101
Master volume ················································· 115
Media controller ················································· 78
Menu map ·························································· 84
Mode ·································································· 97
Monitor Out ······················································ 107
MP3 ·································································· 143
MPEG ······························································· 143
MultEQ
®
XT ····················································· 100
Mute Level ··············································· 114, 115
Index
Basic version
Advanced version
InformationInformation
151
v N
Napster ························································· 40, 49
Network Setup ··········································· 27, 110
Last.fm Account ············································ 113
Last.fm Display ·············································· 113
Napster Account ············································ 113
Network Connecting ······································ 110
Network Information ······································ 113
Other······························································ 112
v O
Option Setup ···················································· 115
Add New Feature··········································· 117
Dimmer ·························································· 116
Firmware Update ··········································· 117
GUI································································· 115
Maintenance Mode········································ 118
Quick Select Name ········································ 116
Remote Setup Guide ····································· 116
Setup Lock ····················································· 117
Source Delete ················································ 115
Trigger Out····················································· 116
Volume Control ·············································· 115
Zone Rename ················································ 116
v P
Panorama ··························································· 97
Parameter Check ················································ 27
Party mode ························································· 76
Picture Adjust ··················································· 102
Play ····································································· 93
Playback
Blu-ray Disc player ··········································· 30
CD player ························································· 30
Direct ························································· 53, 57
DVD player ······················································· 30
Flickr ································································ 45
FM/AM····························································· 35
Internet radio ··················································· 41
iPod (Control dock for iPod) ····························· 31
iPod (USB)························································ 33
Last.fm····························································· 47
Media server ···················································· 44
MP3 ··························································· 40, 51
MPEG-4 AAC ············································· 40, 51
Napster ···························································· 49
Network audio ················································· 39
PTY ·································································· 37
Pure direct ················································· 53, 57
RDS·································································· 36
RT ···································································· 38
Stereo ······························································ 57
TP····································································· 37
USB memory device ········································ 51
WMA ························································· 40, 51
ZONE2 ····························································· 82
Playback Mode (Control dock for iPod) ·············· 94
Playback Mode (NET/USB) ································· 94
PLIIz Height ························································ 98
Power On Level ······································· 114, 115
Preset codes ············································ 116, 121
Preset Name ······················································ 95
Preset Skip ························································· 95
Presetting radio stations ···································· 35
Progressive ······················································ 143
Progressive Mode ·············································· 92
Protection circuit ·············································· 143
PTY ····································································· 37
v Q
Quick select ················································· 73, 83
Quick Select Name ·········································· 116
v R
Random ······························································ 94
Rch Level ························································· 114
RDS ···································································· 36
Rear panel ························································ 129
REC OUT mode ·················································· 74
Reference Level Offset ···································· 100
Remote control setting ································ 22, 67
Remote control unit ································· 120, 130
Inserting the batteries···································· 131
Operating AV devices ···································· 120
Operating devices ·········································· 123
Registering Preset Codes ······························ 121
Remote mode ·············································· 31, 33
Remote Setup Guide ········································ 116
Rename ······························································ 93
Repeat ································································ 94
Resetting the microprocessor ·························· 148
Resolution ·························································· 92
RESTORER ······················································· 102
Room Size ·························································· 97
RT ······································································· 38
v S
Sampling frequency ········································· 143
Screensaver ····················································· 115
Selecting the input source ································· 28
Setup Lock ······················································· 117
Shuffle ································································ 94
Sleep timer ··················································· 71, 83
Slide Show ························································· 94
Source Delete ·················································· 115
Source Level ······················································ 93
SOURCE SELECT ··············································· 89
Speaker ······························································ 99
Connect ··························································· 61
Install ······························································· 59
Set up ·················································· 21, 27, 67
Speaker Config. ················································ 104
Speaker impedance ···································· 61, 143
Speaker Setup ·················································· 104
Stage Height ···················································· 101
Stage Width ····················································· 101
Still Picture ························································· 94
Subwoofer ·························································· 99
Subwoofer setting ·············································· 22
Surr.Back ·························································· 105
Surround Back ···················································· 98
Surround back speaker ····················· 59, 60, 61, 62
Surround Mode ·········································· 53, 133
Surround Parameters ········································· 97
S-Video cable ······················································ 13
sYCC601 color ·················································· 143
SYSTEM SETUP ··············································· 103
v T
Tone ··································································· 99
Tone Control ······················································· 99
TP ······································································· 37
Trademark ························································ 132
Treble ························································· 99, 114
Trigger Out ······················································· 116
Troubleshooting ··············································· 144
Turning off the sound temporarily ······················ 29
v V
Video ·································································· 91
Video conversion ·················································· 5
Video Convert ····················································· 92
Video Mode ························································ 91
Video Select ······················································· 91
Volume Control ················································ 115
Volume Display ················································ 115
Volume Level ··················································· 114
Volume Limit ············································ 114, 115
vTuner ······························································ 143
v W
Web control ························································ 79
Windows Media DRM ······································ 143
Windows Media Player Ver.11 or later ············· 143
WMA ································································ 143
v X
x.v.Color ······················································· 7, 143
v Z
ZONE2 ················································ 81, 128, 143
ZONE3 ················································ 81, 128, 143
Zone Management ············································· 77
Zone Rename ··················································· 116
Zone Setup ······················································· 114
Basic version
Advanced version
InformationInformation
152
Dimensions
Unit : mm
338.5
382.0
16.0 151.0
167.0
435.0
21.5 22.0
Weight : 11.8 kg
Basic version
Advanced version
InformationInformation
D&M Holdings Inc.
3520 10045 008D
V00
www.denon.com
3

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Denon AVR-3312 bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Denon AVR-3312 in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 38,18 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van Denon AVR-3312

Denon AVR-3312 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Nederlands - 156 pagina's

Denon AVR-3312 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Deutsch - 156 pagina's

Denon AVR-3312 Snelstart handleiding - English - 18 pagina's


Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info